Autodesk Inventor 8 ®
Essentials
Official Training Courseware
52708-010000-1710A
January 23, 2004
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of this product at the time of its publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.
Autodesk Trademarks The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3DSurfer, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC Authority (logo), AEC-X, Animator Pro, Animator Studio, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk (logo), Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk University (logo), Autodesk View, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, Biped, bringing information down to earth, CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), Codec Central, Combustion, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), Discreet, EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop, Inside Track, Kinetix, MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, NAAUG, ObjectARX, PeopleTracker, Physique, Planix, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), RadioRay, Revit, Softdesk, Texture Universe, The AEC Authority, The Auto Architect, VISION*, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual TugBoat, Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo). The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3ds max, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk Map, Autodesk Streamline, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, Buzzsaw.com, Cinestream, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax ready (logo),Heads-up Design, IntroDV, jobnet, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online, Plans & Specs, Plasma, PolarSnap, ProjectPoint, Reactor, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Where Design Connects.
Autodesk Canada Inc. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc. in the USA and/or Canada, and/or other countries: discreet, fire, flame, flint, flint RT, frost, glass, inferno, MountStone, riot, river, smoke, sparks, stone, stream, vapour, wire. The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: backburner, backdraft, MultiMaster Editing.
Third Party Trademarks All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright © 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE ® and other Pantone, Inc., trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.
GOVERNMENT USE Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Contents Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Starting an Autodesk Inventor Design Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Autodesk Inventor Workflow Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Autodesk Inventor Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Part Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Assembly Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Presentation Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Drawing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Using Templates Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Projects in Autodesk Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Project Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Project Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Project Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Creating Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Editing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Exercise: Projects in Autodesk Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 The User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 The Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 The Panel Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 3D Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Exercise: The User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Online Help and Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Help Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 How To Popups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 What's New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Visual Syllabus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Help For AutoCAD Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Autodesk Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Exercise: Online Help and Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Challenge Exercise: Introducing the Modeling Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Creating Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Sketch Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Sketch Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
i
Rules for Creating Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Sketch Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Precise Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Editing Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Sketch Doctor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Exercise: Creating Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Constraining Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Constraining Sketches in Autodesk Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Geometric Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Planning Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Showing and Deleting Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Show All Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Use Construction Geometry in the Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Exercise: Constraining Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Dimensioning Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Parametric Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Driven Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Additional Options for Applying Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Automatic Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Displaying Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Guidelines for Dimensioning Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Exercise: Dimensioning Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Chapter 3: Creating Simple Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Introduction to Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simple Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consumed and Unconsumed Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sketches and Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Sketch Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Introduction to Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Sketch Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Sketch Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Part Face to Define a Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Model Edge Referencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Reference Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Working with Sketch Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Extruded Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Extruded Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Extrude Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feature Relationships - Join, Cut, and Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Creating Extruded Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Revolved Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Revolved Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Revolve Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ii
Contents
132 133 134 136 137 139 140 141 143 145 148 152 153 154 155 159 160 163 165 166 167 168
Feature Relationships - Join, Cut, and Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Exercise: Creating Revolved Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Challenge Exercise: Creating Simple Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Default Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 The Work Plane Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Examples of Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Work Plane Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Exercise: Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Work Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Default Work Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 The Work Axis Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Example of Work Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Work Axis Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Exercise: Work Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Center Point Work Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 The Work Point Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Grounded Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Additional Examples of Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Exercise: Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Work Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Fillet Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 The Fillet Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Exercise: Fillet Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Chamfer Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 The Chamfer Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Exercise: Chamfer Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Hole and Thread Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 The Hole Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Thread Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Exercise: Hole and Thread Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Shell Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 The Shell Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Exercise: Shell Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Pattern Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 The Rectangular Pattern Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 The Circular Pattern Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Exercise: Pattern Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Face Drafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
iii
The Face Draft Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Face Drafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Using Color Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Using Color Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Creating and Using Color Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Placed Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
266 269 270 271 273 274 275
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Introduction to Assembly Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Modeling Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Panel Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Introduction to Assembly Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-Place Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visibility Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Resequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Restructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Browser Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Browser Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabled Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grounded Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Design Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Assembly Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Place Component Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sources of Placed Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dragging Components into an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Placing Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Parts in Place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Work Features in Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using 2D Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Projected Edges and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Creating Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Degrees of Freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unconstrained Drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constrained Drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constraint Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving and Rotating Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Moving Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constraining Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv
Contents
278 279 285 286 287 288 289 291 292 292 295 296 297 298 299 301 302 303 305 307 309 312 313 314 318 319 321 324 325 326 328 328 329 332 334 335 336 340 344
Editing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Using ALT-Drag to Place Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Exercise: Constraining Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Adaptive Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Introduction to Adaptive Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Methods for Creating Adaptive Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Adaptive Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Adaptive Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Adaptive Occurrence in Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Applying Assembly Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Tips and Considerations for Using Adaptivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Exercise: Adaptive Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Assembly Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 The Analyze Interference Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 The Analyze Faces Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Locating Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Exercise: Assembly Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Creating a Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Creating Tweaks and Trails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Animating a Presentation View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Exercise: Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Challenge Exercise: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Setting Drafting Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Drafting Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Text Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Dimension Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Drawing Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Exercise: Setting Drafting Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Drawing Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Editing the Default Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Using a Sheet Format for Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Creating Multiple Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Creating Sheet Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Defining a Border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Defining a Title Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Editing Title Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Exercise: Drawing Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Creating a Base View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Creating Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Editing Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Exercise: Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Creating Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
v
Assembly Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Auxiliary Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Auxiliary Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Auxiliary Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Broken Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Broken Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Broken Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Broken Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Break Out Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Break Out Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Break Out Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Break Out Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Views and Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Views between Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Views between Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Managing Views and Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning a Drawing View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Retrieving Model Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Dimensioning a Drawing View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Annotation Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating Centerlines and Center Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes and Leaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: General Annotation Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
441 443 445 446 447 450 451 452 453 456 459 460 461 463 464 465 466 469 470 471 472 476 477 478 479 480 481 486 490 491 492 500 507 511 516 521 522 523
Chapter 8: Project Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Irrigation Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
vi
Contents
Preface
Preface Preface Preface
Introduction Welcome to Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials Courseware, a training manual for use in Authorized Training Centers and in corporate training and classroom settings. Although this manual is designed to be used as a teaching tool for instructor-led courses, it can also be used for self-paced learning. The primary objectives of the manual are to help you become productive quickly with the features and functionality of Autodesk Inventor 8, and to encourage self-learning through the use of the Autodesk Inventor Design Support System (DSS). This manual is part of the Autodesk Official Training Courseware (AOTC) series designed primarily for instructorled classes.
Note
Instructor-led training in either short or long courses is an effective method to learn computer application software. Autodesk Inventor is designed for easy learning. The integrated Design Support System (DSS) provides you with ongoing support as well as access to online documentation. Each chapter in this manual has instructional design so that it is easy to follow and understand. Each exercise is taskoriented and is based on real-world examples of mechanical engineering.
Course Objectives At the end of this course, you will be able to:
Prerequisites This course is designed to teach new users of Autodesk Inventor the essential elements of using Autodesk Inventor 8 for Mechanical Design. 2D Drafters wanting to learn the basics of 3D design techniques are also encouraged to attend this course. It is recommended that you have a working knowledge of Microsoft Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0/Windows 2000, or Windows XP, and a working knowledge of parametric solid modeling concepts.
2
Preface
Chapter Flow •
Introduction and Objectives. Provides an introduction to the chapter theme and states specific learning objectives for the chapter.
•
Topics. Each chapter is a collection of topics that together form the theme of the chapter. Each topic contains an Introduction, Concepts, Objectives, Prerequisite and Summary.
•
Summary. Summarizes the chapter.
Notes and Tips Throughout this courseware, there are Notes and Tips included for special attention. Tips provide special information that will enhance your productivity within the topic.
Tip
Notes can contain information that provides guidelines, constraints or warnings about the topic.
Note
Exercise Data Files
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
3
Exercise Data Files The exercise data files for this manual are supplied in a self-installing file called Setup.exe on the Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials CD attached to the back cover of your book.
Installing the Exercise Data Files To install the files:
Step 1.
Insert the Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials CD-ROM into your computer and follow the instructions in the setup wizard. If the wizard does not automatically start, browse to the root directory of the CD and double-click Setup.exe.
2.
By default, the exercise files will be installed to the C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AOTC\Inventor 8\Essentials folder unless you use the Browse button to specify a different folder.
3.
The Essentials folder contains the files necessary to complete each exercise in the training manual.
Projects Most engineers work on several projects at a time, and each project may consist of a number of files. To accommodate this, Autodesk Inventor uses projects to help organize related files and maintain links between files. Each exercise has a project file that stores the paths to all the files related to the exercise. When you attempt to open a file, Autodesk Inventor uses the paths in the current project file to locate other necessary files. To work on a different project, you set a new project active in the Project Editor.
4
Preface
Introduction to the Modeling Process Chapter Introduction
In this chapter
In this chapter you learn about...
After completing this chapter, you will be able to...
•
File types in Autodesk Inventor.
•
The typical workflow on a design session in Autodesk Inventor, different assembly modeling concepts, and the types of files you can create and use with Autodesk Inventor software.
•
Start an Autodesk Inventor design session.
•
Create a design using various methods and workflows.
•
Create and edit project files for use in different environments and situations.
•
Project files in Autodesk Inventor.
•
Different types of project files and the environments in which they should be used.
•
Creating and editing project files.
•
The main interface components found in Autodesk Inventor software.
•
•
The Browser, Panel Bar, and other interface features that are common to all Autodesk Inventor design environments.
Identify the main interface components found in Autodesk Inventor software.
•
Access the help system and other online resources for learning Autodesk Inventor software.
•
The Design Support System or DSS.
•
The help system and tutorials available to Autodesk Inventor users.
•
The online help and tutorials available for learning.
Getting Started Overview Overview
Overview In this lesson you will learn the Autodesk Inventor software interface, workflow, and file types.
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
6
•
Start an Autodesk Inventor design session.
•
Understand the concept of Parametric Modeling.
•
Understand the typical design workflow when using Autodesk Inventor.
•
Understand the available file types in Autodesk Inventor.
•
Understand how to use template files.
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
Starting an Autodesk Inventor Design Session The first time you start an Autodesk Inventor design session, the open dialog box will appear showing the Getting Started screen with links to various resources. If you are new to Autodesk Inventor or if you have just upgraded to the most current release, this screen will present you with links to some helpful information. Procedure
Open Dialog Box - Getting Started Pane
Getting Started •
See "What's New" in Autodesk Inventor: This link opens a help file containing all the new features in this release.
•
Learn about constraints: This option launches a multi-media presentation that will teach you about constraints.
•
Learn about AutoCAD to Inventor Help: This option launches a help file specifically designed for AutoCAD users making the transition to Autodesk Inventor. Features include slide graphics with links to specific help files and other information related to the differences between the software applications.
•
Learn how to build models quickly: This option opens the main page to a series of helpful tutorials such as Using Constraints, Creating a Part, Creating Assemblies, and Advanced Topics.
•
Learn about projects: This option presents the Autodesk Inventor Help Site Map, with focus on the Autodesk Inventor Projects help links. Each link
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
7
presents a help topic with specific information on each project.
Open Dialog Box - New Pane
New In the Open dialog box, in the What To Do area, click New and a list of all available templates for creating Autodesk Inventor files will be displayed. •
Default Tab: Lists the default templates based upon the default units type you select during installation.
•
English Tab: Lists the available English Unit templates.
•
Metric Tab: Lists the available Metric Unit templates.
Open Dialog Box - Open Pane
Open In the Open dialog box, in the What To Do area, click Open and the three main areas of the Open dialog box will be displayed.
8
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
•
Locations: This window presents the folders defined in the active project file. Each folder icon represents a shortcut you can select to list its files and subfolders.
•
Main Window: All files and folders contained in the selected location are listed in this window.
•
Preview Window: This window will display a preview of the selected Autodesk Inventor file.
•
Standard Windows Navigation Buttons: Autodesk Inventor uses standard Microsoft Windows®navigation tools in all of its file related dialog boxes.
Open Dialog Box - Projects Pane
Projects In the Open dialog box, in the What To Do area, click Projects and Projects - Select a project file areas will be displayed. •
List of Available Projects: Double click on the project to make it active. The active project will have a check mark next to the project name. The Project Location column displays the path where the project is stored.
•
Project Definition Pane: This window displays the project categories and paths defined for each category.
More detailed information on Projects will follow later in this chapter.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
9
Autodesk Inventor Workflow Concepts Autodesk Inventor is a parametric modeler. This means that the geometry is controlled by the parameters and/or constraints that you apply. As opposed to non-parametric systems whose dimension values are representative of the size of the geometry. Concept
Another key aspect to Inventor is it ability to create adaptive parts. Adaptivity enables you to create dynamic relationships between parts in an assembly. When one part changes, adaptive capabilities in Autodesk Inventor will enable the related parts to change without the need to create complex cross-part parametric equations. For example, when you create a 2D sketch in a parametric modeler, you focus only on the shape of the sketch. You do not need to draw your lines and circles at specific lengths or diameters. After you create the sketch you place the required dimensions and the sketch geometry will update to reflect the dimension values you enter. As you create these dimensions, they are stored as individual parameters which you can change at a later time. If the parameter changes, the geometry to which it has been applied will also change to reflect the new value of the parameter.
Sketch - Before and After Dimensions
10
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
The parametric capability then extends beyond the sketch level to the 3D feature level. When you extrude your 2D sketch, the depth of the extrusion is also stored as a parameter and is then used to drive the geometry representing the extrusion.
As you create your parametric model, the parameters are stored in a table that you can access later and change if necessary. These parameters are created automatically and are used by the application to resolve geometry as new features are added. Note: Is is possible to change these parameters to include formulas or use recognizable names such as Length and Width. After you create the part, you may use it in an assembly file along with other parts. The parametric capabilities are now extended to the assembly environment by using 3D Constraints to constrain the parts together. Constraint properties such as Offset and Angle values are stored as parameters within the assembly.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
11
After you create the parts and assembly, the parametric technology is extended to the drawing environment. Drawing views are created and maintain an associative link to the part and assembly. It is possible to retrieve the parametric dimensions used in creating the geometry as well as additional dimensions as required. If changes occur in the part or assembly files, those changes will be reflected in the drawing.
The image below represents the basic file references that exist in a typical parametric design.
Basic Parametric File Relationships
12
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
Autodesk Inventor Workflow Autodesk Inventor has been designed to facilitate the typical workflow you will encounter in the design process. Because typical design workflow changes and evolves with the design, the workflow for creating designs in Autodesk Inventor is flexible. With the exception of a couple of fundamental rules, there is no set workflow for creating designs using Autodesk Inventor. As the designer, you will choose the appropriate path based upon your design intent. Procedure
In this lesson you will learn the typical workflow of an Autodesk Inventor design session.
Typical Autodesk Inventor Design Workflow
Overall Workflow of a Typical Autodesk Inventor Design Session. The overall workflow of any Autodesk Inventor design will involve the following steps, within each step further variations will occur. As you proceed through this course, you learn more about each of the steps listed below. •
Be aware of your current Autodesk Inventor Project. Projects are used to resolve file references for assemblies, presentations, and drawings.
•
Use one of the templates provided to create your new part.
•
On the initial sketch you create, draw the profile of the parts base feature.
•
Use both Sketched and Placed Features to create the 3D geometry you require for your design.
•
Place and constrain the parts in the 3D Assembly (required only when the component is part of a larger assembly of components).
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
13
•
If the design requires an exploded view, create the Presentation representing the exploded assembly.
•
Creating 2D Drawings.
Part Design Workflow The following steps represent the overall workflow for creating parts using Autodesk Inventor software. •
Use one of the part templates provided to create a new part.
•
All new parts you create will have a blank sketch automatically placed. Create the profile of your geometry on the initial sketch.
•
You then use sketched features such as Extrude and Revolve to create your Base Feature.
•
You create Additional Sketched and/or Placed features as required to generate the necessary 3D geometry.
Assembly Creation Workflow The following steps represent the overall workflow for creating assemblies using Autodesk Inventor software.
14
•
Create a new assembly using one of the assembly templates provided.
•
Place existing parts into the assembly or create new parts in the context of the assembly.
•
Use standard assembly constraints such as Mate, Angle, Tangent and Insert to position and constrain the parts to other parts in the assembly.
•
Repeat the steps above until all components are added to the assembly.
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
Drawing Creation Workflow The following steps represent the overall workflow for creating drawings using Autodesk Inventor software. •
Use one of the drawing templates provided to create a new drawing.
•
Use standard view creation tools to create the required 2D drawing views.
•
Use the annotation tools to create the required annotation.
•
Repeat the steps above to create additional sheets and views as required.
Part Files Part files represent the foundation of all designs using Autodesk Inventor. You use the part file to describe the individual parts which make up an assembly. The file extension is *.ipt Principle
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
15
Assembly Files Assembly files consist of multiple part files assembled in a single file to represent your assembly. You use assembly constraints to constrain all of the parts to each other. The assembly file contains references to all of its component files. File extension: *.iam
Principle
Presentation Files You use presentation files to create exploded views of the assembly. It is also possible to animate the exploded views to simulate how the assembly should be put together or taken apart. File extension: *.ipn Principle
16
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
Drawing Files You use drawing files to create the necessary 2D documentation of your design. Drawing files include dimensions, annotations, and views required for manufacturing. When you use a drawing file to create 2D views of an existing 3D model, the views are associative to the 3D model and changes in model geometry are automatically reflected in the drawing. You can also use drawing files to create simple 2D drawings in much the same way you would use other 2D drawing programs. File extension: *.idw Principle
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
17
Using Templates Files Template files serve as the basis for all new files you create using Autodesk Inventor software. By using the template files you create, properties such as units, snap spacing, and default tolerances are automatically applied to your new file. Principle
Autodesk Inventor offers template files for each type of file. Template files are categorized into two main groups: (a) English for english units, inch and feet and (b) Metric, for metric units such as millimeter and meter. The Open dialog box offers three tabs: (a) Default, (b) English, and (c) Metric. The Default tab presents templates based upon the default unit you select during installation, while the English and Metric tabs present template files for their respective units.
Open Dialog Box - Templates
To create a new Autodesk Inventor file, click the tab representing the required unit type, then select the appropriate template and click Open.
Need Your Own Custom Template Tab? Tip
18
Create a new folder containing at least one file in the templates folder of your Autodesk Inventor installation. The next time you create a new Autodesk Inventor file, a new tab will appear in the Open dialog box with the name of your new folder.
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
Projects in Autodesk Inventor Overview Overview
Overview You use project files to resolve path locations of Autodesk Inventor software files. When an assembly file is loaded, the location of the part files must be resolved. The same is true when loading a drawing or presentation files. In this lesson you will learn the concept and implementation of Autodesk Inventor software Project files.
Active Project
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Understand the concept of Projects
•
Understand the concept of Autodesk Inventor project files
•
Setup Autodesk Inventor Projects
•
Create Autodesk Inventor Projects
•
Edit Autodesk Inventor Project files
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
19
Project Concepts When you use Autodesk Inventor software to create designs, each one will consist of multiple files and file types. The design and documentation of a single part file will require at least two separate files: (a) a part file and (b) a drawing file. The design and documentation of assembly models will require a minimum three different file types: (a) assembly files, (b) part files, and (c) drawing files. Project Concepts
Using separate files for each file type is critical for performance and is common among most parametric modeling systems. This is the sole purpose of project files. By storing path information for each project, Autodesk Inventor software knows exactly where to look for the required files when opening an assembly, presentation, or drawing file. The below image represents file dependencies that exist in a typical assembly design.
Typical File Dependencies
When you open an assembly, drawing, or presentation file, the active project file is used to resolve path locations to the referenced files.
20
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
Project Files When you create designs you probably organize them in different folder locations. The same is true for Autodesk Inventor Project files. You will generally create one project file for each design you create. Project Files - Concept
There is no limit to the number of project files you can create, but only one project can be active at any time. In the below image, the active project is identified by the check mark.
Example List of Available Projects
Project File Categories Each Project file is divided into separate categories in which you will define different paths. A typical Autodesk Inventor design will make use of some or all of these categories depending on the structure of your assembly and the environment in which you are working.
Project File Categories
•
Included File: In a semi-isolated environment, the master project shared by the design team is included in individual projects so that all data in the workgroup folder are accessible and managed from a single project.
•
Workspace: A personal location where you edit your personal copy of design files in single-user, semi-isolated, and vault modes. For single-user and vault modes, the workspace should be the only defined editable location. Only one designer should use a project with a defined workspace in a single session of Autodesk Inventor at a time.
•
Local Search Paths: Avoid using a local search path except for design exploration. Do not use it for design project data. Do not make a local search Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
21
path a subfolder of the workspace folder. Local search paths are searched after the workspace is searched. •
Workgroup Search Paths: Workgroup folder locations are defined in the project workgroup search path and are the master project locations used by shared and semi-isolated modes for file check out and check in.
•
Libraries: You use this category to define search paths for part libraries. Part libraries can consist of standard off-the-shelf components that you use in your designs, or can also include common parts that you design. The common factors in all Libraries is that the path is considered by Autodesk Inventor software to be read-only and parts stored within a library search path rarely, if ever, change. If library folders are defined, each needs a descriptive name that should not change. Because the library name is stored in the reference, changing the library name later will break library references.
•
Options: You use these properties to set specific options for the Project file.
Project Categories - Search Order Knowing and remembering the category search order is critical to properly implementing and managing project files. The below image represents a typical Project file with path locations defined in each category. When Autodesk Inventor software needs to locate referenced files, it will search for files using paths contained in each category using the following order. 1. Libraries 2. Workspace 3. Local Search Paths 4. Workgroup Search Paths A simple way to remember the search order is to remember Libraries first, then the order each category appears in the Project window.
Project Category Search Order
When examining this diagram, you will see the assembly file is stored in a different location from the component files.
22
•
Component files exist in the Components folder.
•
Assembly files exist in the Robot Assembly folder.
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
Because the Components folder is a sub-folder of the defined workspace, it is used to resolve the component locations. The Hex Cap Screw is stored in a folder defined as a Library category.
File Resolution Example
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
23
Project Setup How you setup your Projects will depend largely on the type of environment in which you are working. For example, setting up Projects for a single user environment will differ from multi-user environment. Procedure
In this lesson you will learn how to setup Project files for both a single-user and multiuser environment.
Open Dialog Box - Project Pane The Projects portion of the Open dialog box is divided in to two panes.
Typical Single-User Project
Select Project Pane: Select a Project to edit or double-click on a Project to activate it. Note: You cannot edit the active Project or activate a different project, if there are files open in Autodesk Inventor software. Edit Project Pane: Select the category or right-click on the option you want to change. When you edit search paths they are divided into two sections: (a) Named Shortcut and (b) Category Search Path.
24
•
The Named Shortcut will appear in the Open dialog box, enabling you to easily navigate to the search path.
•
The Category Search Path stores the path location.
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
Open Dialog Box - Location Shortcuts When you Open files, the Locations area of the dialog box displays all of the Named Shortcuts contained in the active Project.
Using Relative Paths in Your Project Files It is possible to set your Project file to use relative paths instead of storing the complete path in each category. Using relative paths enables greater portability of your Project Files and datasets. When you enable the Use Relative Paths setting, the path settings begin with .\ followed by the folder location relative to the physical location of the Project file. In the following example, the Robot-Assembly.ipj file is stored in the folder C:\Designs\Robot Assembly.
Relative Paths On/Off
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
25
When you use relative paths in your Project file, it is possible to physically move the entire folder structure to another location or storage device. As long as the folders maintain their relative location to the storage location of the Project file, Autodesk Inventor will be able to resolve the files as required.
Project File Location We recommend that you store your project file in the upper level folder of your project design folders. This will help to keep your project file organized with your designs and will simplify portability issues.
Typical File Structure - Project File Location
Projects Folder Option Because you can store your project files in a number of different locations, you need an efficient way of locating them. Rather than search every folder on your computer or network, Autodesk Inventor software uses Windows®shortcuts to point to the project files that have been accessed on your computer. On the Tools menu, click Application Options, then click the Files tab. The default Projects Folder option is will be set to your My Documents folder. If you would like to use a different path for your Project files, enter or browse a new location.
Options Dialog Box - Projects Folder
26
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
In the below image, the My Documents folder is selected to list all files. The Project file shortcuts in the right-hand pane of the Explorer window are not the actual project files. They are Windows®shortcuts to the actual project files.
Listing of Project File Shortcuts
Setting Up Folder Structures A typical project might have parts and assemblies unique to the project, standard components unique to your company, and off-the-shelf components such as fasteners, fittings, or electrical components. To reduce the possibility of file resolution problems, set up a folder structure before you create a project and start saving files. To help organize your design files, it is a good idea to set up subfolders under your project workspace or workgroup folder. You can keep all your design files for a project in the subfolders, making it a logical way to organize the files used in a design project. Because references are stored as relative paths from project folders, if you change the folder structure, move, or rename files, you are likely to break file references. Always save new files in the workspace or workgroup defined for your project or one of its subfolders. Use these guidelines as you create a folder structure for files associated with a project: •
Follow your company standards and naming conventions for the project folders.
•
If you plan to edit files from existing designs, copy them to the desired workspace or workgroup subfolder.
•
If you intend to reference existing design files, copy them to a library folder, or define a library in your project that locates the root folder of the project in which the parts were released.
•
Keep the subfolder structure relatively flat and do not store files that are unrelated to the project under the root folder. Avoid storing more than one hundred files in a single folder.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
27
Multi-User Project Settings There are four Multi-User settings that you can use to control the type of Project. The setting you choose will largely depend upon your working environment. •
Off (Single User): You use this option for a single-user environment where Check-In and Check-Out capabilities are not required because the data is not shared with others in a workgroup. All design files are in one folder (the workspace) and its subdirectories, except for files referenced from libraries. Original files are stored in a personal workspace that is intended to be used by only a single user. You do not have to check out files. The file check-out status is not available in the browser.
Typical Multi-User Off (single) project setup Included File
Not defined.
Workspace search paths
One defined at .\. (Same location as project file.)
Local search paths
Not defined.
Workgroup search paths
Not defined.
Library Locations
One or more defined. If library folders are defined, each needs a descriptive name that should not change. Because the library name is stored in the reference, changing the library name later will break library references.
Options
Multi User = Off Use relative path = True Old versions to keep on save = 1 (the higher the number the more disk space required).
•
28
Shared: Shared user mode is only appropriate for small design groups with well-defined roles for editing design files. Of the multi-user modes, shared is the least flexible because all design team members share a single workgroup location. If one designer is doing most of the work, you can locate the workgroup on his or her computer and make it available as a network share to other team members. A shared project defines a workgroup location and one or more library locations. Set the project to Use Relative Paths = True, and locate the Workgroup at .\. Place the project Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
(.ipj) in the workgroup folder. Design team members share the workgroup location, where they make and save file changes. Design team members open, work on, and save the original files directly in the workgroup folders where they are stored, rather than copy them locally. Designers can see when someone has a file checked out and are prevented from replacing the work of one another. Note that checking out a file does not protect it from being moved, copied, or deleted using Microsoft®Windows Explorer. Design team members always have access to the most up-to-date versions when they open files or refresh them. A file status browser shows the check-out status of project files that are in the workgroup and workspace locations. You can check files in and out from the file status browser. Canceling a check out makes it available to other designers but does not restore it to its state before check out.
Typical Shared mode project setup Included File
Not defined.
Workspace search paths
One defined at .\. (Same location as project file.)
Local search paths
Not defined.
Workgroup search paths
Not defined.
Library Locations
One or more defined. If library folders are defined, each needs a descriptive name that should not change. Because the library name is stored in the reference, changing the library name later will break library references.
Options
Multi User = Shared Use relative path = True Old versions to keep on save = 1 (the higher the number the more disk space required).
•
Semi-Isolated: If Autodesk Vault is not available, semi-isolated mode is the most powerful of the multi-user options. Unlike the vault, you have access to only the number of file versions you specify in the project, and cannot access vault advanced database query and configuration capabilities. Semi-isolated mode is useful when you need to isolate a part or subassembly, or work with copies of parts and assemblies to evaluate design variations. If necessary, after you make design changes and decide to discard them, you can cancel the
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
29
check out to revert the file back to the original file. One advantage semi-isolated mode has over vault mode is that each designer needs only enough workspace storage for files he or she is actively editing, and there is no need to update the workspace to see changes other designers have checked in. Each designer always has access to the latest checked-in changes, plus any personal changes. All design team members share a master project, which is included in their personal project, and defines the workgroup and library locations of the design project data files. Checking out files automatically copies them from the workgroup to your personal workspace for editing. Checked-out files are saved to your personal workspace after editing. Files not checked out continue to be referenced from the central work group location and cannot be saved. Design team members do not see changes to files saved by others until the files are checked in to the workgroup location. A file status browser shows the check-out status of project files that are in the workgroup and workspace locations. You can check files in and out from the file status browser. Upon file check in, the file is automatically copied from your personal workspace to the workgroup removed from your personal workspace, and the previous version moved to the OldVersions folder. The workgroup uses this new version when the file is opened or checked out in the future. Canceling a check out removes the file reservation, deletes the workspace version, and leaves the original file in the workgroup. No changes are saved to the file. When you save a file, the previous version is moved to the OldVersions folder. Any designer that already had the file open will continue to access that version until they refresh or close and reopen the file.
Master Project (shared by entire group) setup
30
Included File
Not defined.
Workspace search path
Not defined.
Local search paths
Not defined.
Workgroup search paths
One defined at .\.
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
Master Project (shared by entire group) setup Library Locations
When library locations are defined, each must have a descriptive name that does not change and a UNC-based location. The library name is stored as part of the references to files it contains. Library locations can be defined to be in a subfolder of the workgroup, particularly for cases such as the content library. For example, the name would be Content Library and the location would be ./Content Library.
Options
Multi User = Semi-Isolated Use relative path = True Old versions to keep on save = 1 (the higher the number the more disk space required).
Personal Project (one for each user) setup Included File
Location of the workgroup project using a UNC path. You can browse to the included file from the project editor or enter the path.
Workspace search paths
Location of your personal workspace. Locate the personal project at .\(your personal workspace folder).
Local search paths
Not defined.
Workgroup search paths
Not defined. It is inherited from the group project file.
Library Locations
Not defined. It is inherited from the group project file.
Options
Use relative path = True Other options are inherited from the master project.
•
Vault: (You must install Autodesk®Vault to use this mode.)
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
31
Creating Projects You begin to create project files via a wizard type interface. You are prompted to fill in the relevant information such as Type of Project, Project Name, Workspace Folder, and Libraries to import from other Projects. After the initial creation is complete, you proceed to adding the required paths to the categories you will use. Procedure
In this lesson you will learn how to create a project file.
Access Methods You can use either the Autodesk Inventor internal project editor or the standalone project editor to create new projects. Menu
File > Projects
Standalone Project Editor
Start > Programs > Inventor 8 > Tools > Project Editor
Process Overview - Creating Single User Projects The following steps represent an overview for creating a Single User Project. 1. 2.
32
In the Open dialog box, in the Project Pane, click New. In the Autodesk Inventor project wizard dialog box, click New Single User Project and click Next.
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
3.
In the Name field, enter Flange-Assembly and in the Project (Workspace) Folder field, enter C:\Designs\FlangeAssembly. Click Next.
4.
If you have any projects with Libraries defined, they will appear in this list. This enables you to copy Library Paths from other project files. Click Finish to create the project. If you are prompted to create the path, click OK.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
33
Process Overview - Creating Semi-Isolated Projects The following steps represent an overview for creating a Semi-Isolated Project. Your begin by creating a Master Project.
34
1. 2.
In the Open dialog box, in the Project Pane, click New. In the Autodesk Inventor project wizard dialog box, click New Semi-Isolated Master Project and click next.
3.
In the Name field, enter a name for the Master Project. In the Project (Workgroup) Folder, enter a path to the Workgroup folder and click Next.
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
4.
If you have any projects with Libraries defined, they will appear in this list. This enables you to copy Library Paths from other project files. Click Finish to create the project. If you are prompted to create the path, click OK.
After you create your Master Project you create a Personal Project. 1.
In the Open dialog box, in the Project Pane, select the Master Project to use for your Personal Project, then click New.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
35
36
2.
In the Autodesk Inventor project wizard dialog box, click New Semi-Isolated Workspace and click Next.
3.
In the Name field, enter a name for your Workspace Project and enter a path for your workspace. Verify the Master Project File is listed correctly and click Finish. If you are prompted to create the path, click OK.
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
Editing Projects You can use the internal Project Editor or the Standalone Project Editor located on the Windows®Start menu to edit projects. In the Select Project Pane, select the Project to edit. In the Edit Project Pane select the category or option you need to edit. Depending on the item you edit, different options will be available on both the shortcut menu and to the right of the Edit Project Pane. Procedure
Command Access There are two methods available for editing projects. Menu
File > Projects
Standalone Project Editor
Start > Programs > Inventor 8 > Tools > Project Editor
Project Pane - Open Dialog Box
When editing projects, right-clicking on the various categories or options will display the following shortcut menus.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
37
Included File Options
Open: This option opens the project file used in the included file link. Edit: This option edits the link to the included project file. Delete: This option deletes the link to the included project file.
Workspace and Library Category Options
Add Path: This option adds a path to the workspace category. Enter a named shortcut and search path in the fields below the category. Add Paths from File...: This option adds the workspace path contained in another project file. A dialog box will appear for you to select the project file. Paste Path: This option pastes a path that was copied to the clipboard. Delete Section Paths: This option deletes all paths from the category.
Local and Workgroup Category Search Path Options
Add Path: This option adds a path to the workspace category. Add Paths from File...: This option adds the workspace path contained in another project file. A dialog box will appear for you to select the project file. Add Paths from Directory...: Select this option to add the path of a selected directory including all sub-directories. Paste Path: Select this option to paste a path that was copied to the clipboard. Delete Section Paths: Select this option to delete all paths from the category.
38
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
Multi-User Options
Off: Use this option for a single-user environment where Check-In and Check-Out capabilities are not required because the data is not shared with others in a workgroup. Shared: Use this option in a workgroup environment where multiple users may access the same data files. This option enables you to take advantage of the Check-Out/CheckIn features. When you edit any file, you will be prompted to check the file out at which time, the file will remain in its current folder but will be locked from editing by other users. Semi-Isolated: Use this option in a workgroup environment where multiple users may be accessing the same data files. When you edit a file, you will be prompted to check the file out at which time the file will be copied to the workspace defined in your project. The original file remains in its original location, but it is locked from editing until you check-in the version contained in your workspace folder. Vault: Only available if Autodesk Vault is installed.
Edit and Position Buttons Edit and Position Buttons appear on the right-side of the Projects dialog box. Move Up: Select this option to move the selected path up in the search order within its category. Move Down: Select this option to move the selected path down in the search order within its category. Add Path: Select this option to add a path to the selected category. Edit Path: Select this option to edit the selected path.
Editing the Active Project You must close all files in Autodesk Inventor before attempting to edit the active project. Note
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
39
Exercise: Projects in Autodesk Inventor In this exercise, you will create the Project file to be used for the remainder of this course. You are creating a Single User Project file with a Workspace and Library. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process, click Exercise: Projects in Autodesk Inventor
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Completed Active Project File
40
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
The User Interface Overview Overview
Overview In this lesson you will learn about the Autodesk Inventor 8 software interface.
Autodesk Inventor Interface
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Identify the Browser in the Assembly, Part, Presentation, and Drawing environments
•
Identify the Panel Bar
•
Identify the Standard toolbar and groups of standard tools
•
Understand how the menu structure is context sensitive based upon the environment you are using
•
Identify and use Keyboard Shortcuts
•
Identify the 3D Indicator and what it represents
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
41
The Browser The Browser is one of your main interface components. It is context sensitive with the environment you use. For example, when you work on an assembly you use the browser to present information specific to the assembly environment. While you use the Part Modeling environment, the browser displays information that is relevant to part modeling. Procedure
As you progress through this course, you will use the various browser modes.
Part Modeling Environment When you use the browser in the Part Modeling Environment, it will display the origin folder containing the default X, Y, and Z Planes, Axes, and Center Point. It will also list all features you use to create the part. Features are listed in the order in which they are created.
Browser - Part Modeling
Assembly Modeling Environment - Position View When you use the browser in the Assembly Modeling Environment, it displays the origin folder containing the default X, Y, and Z Planes, Axes, and Center Point. It will also list all parts you use in the assembly. Nested under each part you will see the assembly constraints. If you select an assembly constraint, an edit box will appear at the bottom of the browser enabling you to edit the offset or angle value for the constraint.
42
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
Note: If you select the Position View drop-down button you can select Modeling View to switch the browser to display the part features nested under the parts instead of the assembly constraints. This is useful when performing part modeling functions in the context of the assembly.
Browser - Assembly Modeling
Presentation Environment When you use the browser in the Presentation environment, it will display the Presentation views you create followed by the tweaks you use for the explosion. When you expand each weak you will see the part(s) included in each one. It is also possible button to switch the browser mode from Tweak View to Sequence View to select the or Assembly View.
Browser - Presentation View
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
43
Drawing Environment In the Drawing Environment, the browser displays the Drawing Resource folder containing sheet formats, borders, title blocks and sketched symbols. It will also display each sheet in the drawing along with the views you create for each.
Browser - Drawing Modeling
44
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
The Panel Bar The panel bar is your primary interface to the tools available while you design. The context sensitive design presents the relevant tools based upon the current context of your design session. For example, when you switch from assembly modeling to part modeling, the panel bar will automatically switch to display the correct tools for the context where you work. Procedure
The Assembly Panel Bar is displayed below in the default Learning mode. The tool icons, names, and keyboard shortcuts are displayed.
Assembly Panel Bar - Learning Mode
Select the Assembly Panel drop-down menu and click Expert. The Panel Bar switches to Expert mode. Tools are displayed with icons only. This mode allows more area for the browser window. Note: You can also access the Expert mode. Right-click anywhere on the Panel Bar and select Expert.
Assembly Panel - Expert Mode
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
45
You use the Part Modeling Panel Bar to create sketched and placed features in the modeling environment.
Part Modeling Panel Bar
You use the Sketch Panel Bar in the modeling environment and for assembly based sketching to create 2D parametric sketches, dimensions, and constraints.
Sketch Panel Bar
46
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
You use the Presentation Panel Bar to create presentation views, tweaks, and animate geometry in the presentation environment.
Presentation Panel Bar
You use the Drawing Views Panel Bar in the drawing environment to create drawing views on the sheet.
Drawing Views Panel Bar
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
47
You use the Drawing Annotation Panel Bar in the drawing environment to add reference dimensions and other annotation objects.
Drawing Annotation Panel Bar
48
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
Toolbars There are several toolbars available for you to use, but by default only the Standard toolbar is displayed. Procedure
Customizing toolbars is beyond the scope of this course. Please refer to the Autodesk Inventor help system for more information.
Standard Toolbar The Standard toolbar is displayed here in three separate images. It is organized into groups based upon functionality. This area of the toolbar displays tools for standard file and modeling operations.
Standard Toolbar - File and Modeling Tools
This area of the toolbar displays standard viewing tools such as Zoom All, Zoom Window, Rotate, and others.
Standard Toolbar - Viewing Tools
This area of the toolbar displays appearance related tools for controlling your model's appearance.
Standard Toolbar - Appearance Tools
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
49
Menu Structure Autodesk Inventor software utilizes the standard pull-down menu structure common in all Windows application. The menu structure is context sensitive based upon the environment and mode you are using. Procedure
As you are learning Autodesk Inventor, you should take the time to familiarize yourself with the different options that appear on the menu while working in different environments.
Insert Menu - Assembly Modeling Environment
Insert Menu - Part Modeling Environment
Insert Menu - Drawing Environment
50
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
Keyboard Shortcuts On the panel bar and menus, you will use keyboard shortcuts to access tools. For example, P for Place Component, N for Create Component. Entering the keyboard shortcut is the same as clicking the tool on the panel bar or menu. Procedure
Where applicable, the keyboard shortcuts will be listed for the tools as they are explained.
Shortcut Keys Displayed on Panel Bar
3D Indicator While using the Assembly, Part Modeling, and Presentation environments, the 3D Indicator is displayed in the lower left area of the graphics window. The indicator displays your current view orientation in relation to the X, Y, Z axis of the coordinate system. Procedure
3D Indicator
Red: X-Axis
Green: Y-Axis
Blue: Z-Axis
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
51
Exercise: The User Interface Open an assembly and explore the Autodesk Interface. You will experiment with different interface objects in the assembly, part modeling, and sketching environments. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process, click Exercise: The User Interface
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
52
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
Online Help and Tutorials Overview Overview
Overview Autodesk Inventor software offers several types of online help and tutorial references. Standard Help files, context sensitive How-To presentations, and Tutorials are all available. In this lesson you will learn about the different resources available for learning Autodesk Inventor.
Visual Syllabus
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Understand Help Topics
•
Use the How To Popups
•
Access the Help Topic containing information on the new features in this Autodesk Inventor release
•
Access tutorials
•
Access the Visual Syllabus
•
Access the Help for AutoCAD Users
•
Access Autodesk Online
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
53
Help Topics A comprehensive Help Topics section installs by default. You can access the Help Topics window by using the F1 key or any of the other methods listed below. The Help Topics window is only one component of the Help System. Procedure
Access Methods You can use either of the following methods to launch the help topic. Menu
Help > Help Topics
Toolbar
Keyboard Shortcut
F1
Use standard point and click navigation techniques to navigate the help system. You can also enter search words in the left pane of the Help Topics window.
Help Topics - Main Page
As you navigate to specific topics in the help system, icons may appear in the help topics representing specific tools. Click the icon to start the tool.
Help Topics - Command Launch
54
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
How To Popups The Help System is context sensitive. It presents information to you in a manner relevant to each task. Right-click in the graphics window, and on the shortcut menu, click How To. A help topic, or in some cases the Show Me help window, will be displayed containing information on the selected tool in an animated sequence. Procedure
Access Methods You can use the following method to launch the How To Popups. Shortcut Menu
Right-click in the graphics window and on the shortcut menu, click How To.
Show Me Help Window
The below image represents the type of information that is available in the context sensitive How To Popups. The animated sequence will play automatically and you can select the navigation buttons to navigate to specific sequence numbers.
Animated Tangent Line Show Me Presentation
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
55
What's New The What's New help topic contains information on all new features in the current release of Autodesk Inventor. All changes are organized into main categories such as Drawings, Part Modeling, and Sheet metal. Expand the category of interest and use standard point and click navigation to learn about the new features. Procedure
Access Methods You can use the following method to launch the What's New help topic. Menu
Help > What's New
What's New - Help Window
What's New - Specific Topic
56
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
Tutorials There are several tutorials available covering a wide range of topics from Introduction to Advanced. From the main tutorial window, use standard point and click navigation techniques to select the topic of interest. The tutorials present step by step information on performing certain tasks in Autodesk Inventor. Procedure
Access Methods You can use the following method to access the tutorials. Menu
Help > Tutorials
Inventor Tutorials - Main Window and Working with Projects
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
57
Visual Syllabus The Visual Syllabus presents topic specific information in an animated presentation. Start the Visual Syllabus, select the main topic, then select specific feature tools available. Information on the features you select will be presented to you in an animation. Procedure
Access Methods You can use the following method to access the Visual Syllabus. Standard Toolbar
Visual Syllabus - Main Window and Animated Presentation
58
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
Help For AutoCAD Users AutoCAD users can use the Help Topic designed specifically for them as they make the transition to Autodesk Inventor software. Procedure
Access Methods You can use the following method to access the Help for AutoCAD Users. Menu
Help > Help for AutoCAD Users
The below image represents the main window of the Help for AutoCAD Users help topic. Use standard point and click navigation options to navigate to the topic of choice.
Help for AutoCAD Users - Main Window
AutoCAD - Inventor Command Map
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
59
Autodesk Online Autodesk Online is an e-learning portal to training information available for Autodesk software users. The information is presented via HTML, PDF, and other web-friendly formats. Select the Autodesk Inventor Skill Builders link, you will be arrive at a special area of the Autodesk.com website dedicated to providing e-learning materials and tutorials for the Autodesk Inventor user. Procedure
The Autodesk Online portal contains dynamic and new information. It is updated regularly.
Access Methods You can use the following method to access the Autodesk Online. Menu
Help > Autodesk Online
Autodesk Online - Skill Builders Link
Autodesk Online
60
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
Exercise: Online Help and Tutorials In this exercise you will use the online help and tutorials to create a new part with a simple sketch and features. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process, click Exercise: Online Help and Tutorials
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
61
Challenge Exercise: Introducing the Modeling Process Challenge Exercise: Introducing the Modeling Process Print Exercise Reference
In this exercise, you will create two new Autodesk Inventor Project files. (a) Create a new Semi-Isolated Project to be used as a Master Project, then create a Personal Workspace Project and use the Included file option to include the Master Project. Utilize the information contained in this chapter as well as the information contained in the Help System to create the required projects.
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process, click Challenge Exercise: Introducing the Modeling Process
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Completed Project File
62
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
Chapter Summary Summary
You learned the following in this chapter: Summary
•
Starting a design session using Autodesk Inventor software.
•
The typical workflow of creating a design in Autodesk Inventor as well as different assembly modeling concepts.
•
The file types created by Autodesk Inventor and how to use them in your designs.
•
The concept of project files and how they are used to maintain file references between Autodesk Inventor files.
•
Creating and editing project files, and which types of projects are used for particular situations.
•
The user interface for Autodesk Inventor software.
•
Accessing different tools, through the use of keyboard shortcuts.
•
Accessing several different resources for learning Autodesk Inventor software.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
63
64
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process
Introduction to Sketching Chapter Introduction
In this chapter
In this chapter you learn about...
After completing this chapter, you will be able to...
•
Different aspects of creating sketches in Autodesk Inventor software.
•
Create 2D sketches for use in 3D designs.
•
Create sketches using the Precise Input toolbar.
•
Edit sketches.
•
Use the Sketch Doctor to assist in fixing problems with sketches.
•
The sketch environment and available sketch tools.
•
Rules for creating efficient sketches.
•
Using the sketch coordinate system.
•
Using the Precise Input toolbar.
•
Editing sketches and using the Sketch Doctor to fix problems with sketches.
•
Constraining sketches using both automatic and manual 2D constraints.
•
Plan and implement constraints on 2D sketches.
•
Geometric constraints and how they can be used.
•
•
Planning and viewing constraints that have been applied to geometry.
Apply constraints manually and automatically.
•
•
Using construction geometry to assist you in creating 2D sketches.
View and delete constraints that have been applied to geometry.
•
Dimensioning 2D sketches.
•
•
Placing parametric dimensions to control the size of sketch elements.
Use construction geometry to assist in creating 2D sketch geometry.
•
Applying dimensions manually and automatically.
•
Apply dimensions to sketch geometry.
•
Options for displaying dimensions.
•
•
Guidelines for dimensioning sketches.
Apply dimensions using both manual and automatic methods.
Creating Sketches Overview Overview
Overview The fundamental basis for all three-dimensional (3D) designs begins with a sketch. The two-dimensional (2D) geometry contained in the sketch is used to create base features as well as secondary features.
Sketching using the Precise Input toolbar
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to
66
•
Understand the sketch environment
•
Create sketch geometry
•
Understand the rules for creating sketches
•
Understand the Sketch Coordinate System
•
Utilize the Precise Input interface to create sketch geometry
•
Edit sketches
•
Use the Sketch Doctor to fix sketch geometry
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
Sketch Environment When you create sketches, you work in an environment designed specifically for the creation of 2D geometry. Although the geometry varies from part to part, the environment in which the geometry is created is always consistent. Concept
A typical part generally includes multiple sketches positioned along various planes. Each sketch contains different geometry. Because sketches represent the most fundamental part of your design, it is critical that you become comfortable with the environment in which they are created.
Autodesk Inventor sketch environment
Following are some important features in the sketch environment: Sketch panel bar: Displays the 2D sketching tools available. Sketch origin indicator: Used to identify the current location and orientation of the sketch origin and axes. Sketch1: The first sketch in the part. This is automatically created when you create a new part. Sketch axes: Aligned with the sketch origin indicator, represents the X and Y axes of the sketch.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
67
Creating Additional Sketches The first sketch in a new part is automatically created. If you require additional sketches, you must create them manually. A new sketch can be created on a part face, origin plane, or work plane.
Access Methods Toolbar
Select the Sketch tool > Select a face or plane to orient the sketch.
Shortcut Menu
Right-click the face of a part or a work plane, and on the shortcut menu click New Sketch.
Creating additional sketches
68
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
Sketch Tools In the sketch environment, the Panel Bar automatically switches to display the available sketch tools. The 2D Sketch Panel contains all of the tools to assist in creating sketch geometry. Procedure
In this lesson you learn about the most common sketch tools: Line, Arc, Rectangle, Circle, Fillet, and Chamfer. Editing tools are covered in a later chapter. If necessary, refer to the Help Topics for more information about sketch tools.
Sketch Panel Bar
Line Tool The Line tool enables you to create line segments on the sketch. Panel Bar
Shortcut Key
L
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
69
Process Overview - Creating Lines The following steps represent an overview for creating lines in your sketch. 1. 2.
3.
4.
70
On the Panel Bar, click the Line tool and pick a starting point for the line segment. Drag your cursor in the direction you want to draw the line. Note the appearance of the Constraint Glyph. This glyph indicates the type of constraint that is being applied automatically to the line segments.
Pick a point to end the line segment. Drag the cursor in the direction of the next line segment, again paying attention to the Constraint Glyph indicating the automatic constraint.
Pick a point to end the line segment. Continue drawing line segments as required. If the Constraint Glyph represents a constraint that you would like to change, scrub geometry on the sketch for the constraint to be applied and continue drawing the line segment. In the image sequence below, the first image shows that the third line segment is being constrained parallel to the first segment, the second image demonstrates by scrubbing a different sketch element, and the third image shows that the constraint is now inferred to the sketch element being scrubbed.
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
5.
Continue drawing line segments as required.
6.
Right-click in the graphics window, and click Done on the shortcut menu.
Circle Tool The Circle tool enables you to create circles on the sketch. Panel Bar
Shortcut Key
SHIFT+C
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
71
Process Overview - Creating Circles The following steps represent an overview for creating circles in your sketch.
72
1.
To create a center point circle, on the Panel Bar click the Center Point Circle tool and select the center point of the circle.
2.
Drag your cursor to a location representing the outside perimeter of the circle and pick that point to create the circle.
3. 4. 5.
Right-click in the graphics window, and click Done on the shortcut menu. To create a 3-Point Tangent Circle, on the Panel Bar, click the Tangent Circle tool. Select three parts of the geometry that the circle will be tangent to.
6.
Right-click in the graphics window, and click Done on the shortcut menu.
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
Arc Tool The Arc tool enables you to create arcs on the sketch. Panel Bar
Process Overview - Creating Arcs The following steps represent an overview for creating arcs in your sketch. Creating Center Point Arcs: •
On the Panel Bar, click the Center Point Arc tool then pick a point representing the center of the arc.
•
Pick a point representing the start point of the arc. Note: Arcs are created in a counterclockwise direction so pick your start point accordingly.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
73
•
Pick a point representing the endpoint of the arc.
•
Right-click in the graphics window, and on the shortcut menu click Done.
Creating Tangent Arcs:
74
•
On the Panel Bar, click the Tangent Arc tool and pick the geometry being used for the arcs tangency.
•
Drag your cursor and pick the endpoint of the arc. Note the Center Point Projection as you approach a 90-, 180-, or 270-degree arc.
•
Right-click in the graphics window, and click Done on the shortcut menu.
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
Creating 3-Point Arcs: •
On the Panel Bar, click the Three Point Arc tool and pick the start point of the arc.
•
Pick a point for the endpoint of the arc.
•
Drag your cursor to size the arc appropriately. Depending upon existing geometry and arc size, constraint glyphs may appear.
•
Right-click in the graphics window, and on the shortcut menu click Done.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
75
Rectangle Tool The Rectangle tool enables you to create rectangles on the sketch. Panel Bar
Process Overview - Creating Rectangles The following steps represent an overview for creating rectangles in your sketch. Creating a Two-Point Rectangle: 1. 2.
On the Panel Bar, click the Two Point Rectangle tool. Pick a point representing the first corner of the rectangle, then pick a point representing the opposite corner of the rectangle.
3.
Right-click in the graphics window, and click Done on the shortcut menu Creating a Three-Point Rectangle: To create rectangles at angles other than 0 and 90 degrees. On the Panel Bar, click the Three Point Rectangle tool. Pick a point representing the first corner of the rectangle.
4. 5.
76
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
6.
Pick a point representing the second point of the rectangle.
7.
Then drag the cursor to size the rectangle.
8.
Right-click in the graphics window, and on the shortcut menu click Done.
Fillet Tool The Fillet tool enables you to create fillets on the sketch. Panel Bar
2D Fillet Dialog Box
Radius: Enter a radius for the fillet feature. Applies an equal constraint to all fillets you create during the current session of the Fillet tool.
Process Overview - Creating Fillets The following steps represent an overview for creating fillets in your sketch. 1.
On the Panel Bar, click the Fillet tool and enter a radius for the fillet. If you are creating multiple fillets of equal sizes, click the Equal option.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
77
2.
Pick the corner of the geometry being filleted or select each line separately.
3.
Continue selecting geometry or corners to be filleted. Notice with the Equal option set, a dimension appears on only the first fillet you create.
4.
When you are finished adding fillets, right-click in the graphics window, and click Done on the shortcut menu.
Chamfer Tool The Chamfer tool enables you to create chamfers on the sketch. Panel Bar
2D Chamfer Dialog Box
This option will cause dimensions to be placed representing the chamfer.
78
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
This option will constrain secondary chamfers by referencing dimension parameters from the first chamfer created during this session of the Chamfer tool.
Distance: Enter a distance for the chamfer to be applied equally to both sides.
Distance1: Enter a value for one side of the chamfer. Distance2: Enter a value for the second side of the chamfer.
Distance: Enter a value for one side of the chamfer. Angle: Enter a value for the angle of the chamfer.
Process Overview - Creating Chamfers The following steps represent an overview for creating chamfers in your sketch. 1. 2.
On the Panel Bar, click the Chamfer tool. In the 2D Chamfer dialog box, adjust the options as required and select a point to chamfer or select the two entities separately.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
79
3.
If necessary, change the options in the dialog box and continue selecting points or geometry to create additional chamfers.
4.
When you are finished adding chamfers, in the 2D Chamfer dialog box, click Done.
Creating Centerlines You cannot draw centerlines. Instead, you can draw regular line segments using the standard Line tool. You then change the line segment to represent a centerline style. Using centerlines in your sketch will assist in creating revolve features and placing diametric profile dimensions.
Process Overview - Creating Centerlines The following steps represent an overview for creating centerlines in your sketch. 1.
80
On the Panel Bar, click the Line tool and draw a standard line segment where the centerline will be.
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
2.
Select the line segment and on the Standard toolbar, from the Styles drop-down list, select Centerline.
The selected line will be converted to a centerline style.
The centerline can now be used to place diametric profile dimensions.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
81
Rules for Creating Sketches Creating sketch geometry is as easy as drawing a closed shape using Autodesk Inventor Sketch tools. There are several ways to create closed shapes. You can use tools such as the rectangle, circle, or polygon or you can constrain sketch geometry so that separate sketch elements come together to create a closed shape. There will be times when you need to create sketch geometry that is not closed, for example a path for a sweep feature or to create a surface. This lesson focuses on creating closed profiles. Principle
Following are some rules for successful sketching: •
Keep the sketch simple. Do not fillet the corners of a sketch if you can apply a fillet to the edges of the finished 3D feature and achieve the same effect. Complex sketch geometry can be difficult to manage as designs evolve.
•
Repeat simple shapes to build more complex shapes.
•
Draw the profile sketch roughly to size and shape.
•
Accept default dimensions until the shape is stabilized.
•
Use 2D constraints to stabilize sketch shape before size.
•
Use closed loops for profiles.
Creating Sketches - Example
82
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
Sketch Coordinate System Each sketch you create has its own independent coordinate system. This coordinate system is based upon the location and method you use when you create the sketch and is completely independent from the 3D part model's coordinate system. Principle
In most cases, you will not need to edit the sketch coordinates but if required, you can right-click the sketch in the browser and on the shortcut menu, click Edit Coordinate System. You must exit the sketch before you edit the coordinate system so you can change the orientation of the axes and reposition the origin.
Independent Sketch Coordinates
Editing the Sketch Coordinate System The following steps represent an overview for editing the Sketch Coordinate System. 1.
In the event you need to edit the sketch coordinate system, exit the sketch and in the Browser, right-click the sketch and click Edit Coordinate System on the shortcut menu.
The sketch coordinate icon appears, showing its current origin and orientation.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
83
84
2.
To change the sketch coordinate's origin, select the origin of sketch coordinate icon, and then select a new point for the origin.
3.
The change the direction of the X or Y axis, click the axis then select a new edge to align the axis to.
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
Precise Input When creating sketch geometry it is possible to use the Precise Input toolbar to enter precise values or coordinates. This enables you to create sketch geometry at specific lengths or angles prior to placing parametric dimensions. It is also possible to use this tool to create sketch geometry based on relative coordinates from other model geometry. Procedure
Access Methods Use the following method to access the Precise Input tool: Toolbar
View menu > Toolbars > Inventor Precise Input
Precise Input Toolbar
Relative Origin: This option enables you to enter coordinates relative to a point you select. Relative Orientation: This option is used when moving faces on a base solid. It will rotate the axes of the active coordinate system. Relative Orientation is not available while sketching. Delta Input: This option sets the inputs as a delta to the last point picked or entered. The first point is relative to the origin. Subsequent points are relative to the last point picked or entered. Input Type: From the drop-down list, select a data format.
XY: This format specifies a coordinate relative to the origin. In the X and Y boxes, enter the desired values. X°: This format specifies a coordinate by x coordinate and angle from the positive X axis. In the X and ° boxes, enter the desired values. Y°: This format specifies a coordinate by y coordinate and angle from the positive X axis. In the Y and ° boxes, enter the desired values.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
85
d°: This format specifies a coordinate by a distance and angle from the positive X axis. In the D and ° boxes, enter the desired values.
Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using the Precise Input tool.
86
1.
Create a new sketch.
2.
On the View menu, click Toolbars > Inventor Precise Input to display the Inventor Precise Input toolbar.
3. 4.
On the 2D Sketch Panel Bar, click a sketch tool such as Line. To set your relative Precise Relative point, click the icon and pick a point on the sketch geometry. (Optionally enter offset values for the selected point.)
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
The point is previewed. Click to accept the position.
5.
Click the Delta X Delta Y button to move the origin indicator to the last point. From the Input Type drop-down list, select the desired Input Type and enter the appropriate values in the corresponding boxes.
The point is previewed. Click to accept the point.
6.
Continue to enter additional input values as required.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
87
The point is previewed. Click to accept the point.
7.
Continue to enter additional input values as required.
The point is previewed. Click to accept the point.
8.
88
Right-click in the graphics window and click done on the shortcut menu.
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
Editing Sketches As you build your parametric model, you will be creating multiple sketches. When the sketch is used by a feature such as Extrude, Revolve, or Hole, the sketch becomes consumed by the feature and appears under the feature in the Browser. You can see each of the sketches in the Browser by expanding the particular feature(s). The ability to edit these features is fundamental to any parametric modeling session. As you edit the sketches, the changes are applied to the features based upon those sketches. Procedure
In this lesson you learn how to edit sketches.
Access Methods The following methods can be used to edit sketches. Browser
Double-click the sketch.
Browser
Right-click the feature and click Edit Sketch.
Browser
Right-click the sketch and click Edit Sketch.
In the image below, Sketch1 has been consumed by Extrusion1. You can expand the Extrusion1 feature to expose the consumed sketch. Editing the sketch places the model in a rolled back state, where only the features existing at the time this sketch was created are visible. Note the change in appearance in the browser as the background color changes indicating the active feature. When you edit sketches, you are returned to the sketch environment and the Panel Bar changes, providing you with access to all the sketch tools initially used in creating the sketch.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
89
Editing Sketches
On the Standard toolbar, click the Return tool to exit the sketch environment.
90
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for editing sketches. 1.
In the Browser, right-click the feature or sketch and click Edit Sketch on the shortcut menu.
Once the sketch has been activated for editing, you can make changes to geometry, dimensions, and constraints.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
91
92
2.
Continue to make edits to the sketch as required.
3.
When you are done editing the sketch, on the Standard toolbar, click the Return tool to exit the sketch and return to the part model. The changes in the sketch are applied to the 3D features of the part.
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
Sketch Doctor The Sketch Doctor is a tool that assists you in fixing common problems that can occur in your sketches. Common problems include redundant points, missing coincident constraints, and open loops. Procedure
In this lesson you learn how to use the Sketch Doctor to fix common problems in sketches.
Access Methods The following methods can be used to access the Sketch Doctor. Sketched Feature Dialog Box
Browser
This icon is available in the Sketched Feature dialog box if a problem with the sketch is detected. While a sketch is activated, right-click and click Sketch Doctor.
In the Extrude dialog box, the presence of the Red Cross icon indicates that problems have been detected with the sketch. You click this button to start the Sketch Doctor, which will diagnose and assist you in fixing the problems detected. The Sketch Doctor can correct some problems, while other problems may require manual editing and correction.
Extrude Dialog Box - Sketch Problems Detected
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
93
In the Sketch Doctor dialog box, click Diagnose Sketch to start the diagnosis.
Sketch Doctor Dialog Box
In the Diagnose Sketch dialog box, you select the diagnostic tests to perform. By default, all tests are selected.
Diagnose Sketch Dialog Box
Detected problems are listed in the Sketch Doctor dialog box. You select the problem to recover and click Next.
Sketch Doctor Dialog Box
94
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
A problem diagnosis/description is displayed. Information about potential fixes is included.
Sketch Doctor Dialog Box
You select the appropriate treatment option and click Finish.
Sketch Doctor Dialog Box
Sketch Problems Tip
Most sketch problems occur when you import 2D geometry from other applications. Read the import options closely while importing geometry, and import only the geometry required for the sketch.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
95
Exercise: Creating Sketches In this exercise, you create some basic sketch geometry use the sketch to create 3D features. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching, click Exercise: Creating Sketches
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
3D Part Created Using Sketches
96
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
Constraining Sketches Overview Overview
Overview You use geometric constraints to control the sketch geometry to which they have been applied. For example, a vertical constraint, applied to a line segment, forces that line segment to always be vertical. A tangent constraint added to an arc forces that arc to remain tangent to the geometry that it has been constrained. In this lesson you learn how to work with constraint sketches.
2D Constraints on Part Sketch
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Understand the concept of constraining sketches
•
Understand geometric constraints
•
Understand how to plan constraints
•
Show and delete constraints applied to 2D sketch geometry
•
Use the Show All tool to show all constraints applied to a sketch
•
Create and use construction geometry in the sketch
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
97
Constraining Sketches in Autodesk Inventor When you add constraints to 2D geometry, you are adding a level of intelligence to the 2D geometry. Constraints stabilize sketch geometry by placing limits on how the geometry can change as the result of constraint dragging, or dimensions. For example, if a horizontal constraint is applied to a line, that line is forced to be horizontal at all times. Principle
As you create sketches, some constraints are inferred (applied automatically). In most cases the inferred constraints are sufficient for your initial constraints. As you continue to develop the sketch, you may need to add additional constraints to properly stabilize the sketch geometry. The following image illustrates the effect of constraints on sketch geometry. The sketch on the left was purposely drawn utilizing only some of the inferred constraints. The sketch on the right is the result of adding additional constraints such as vertical, horizontal, and colinear.
Sketch Before and After Constraining
98
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
Geometric Constraints Procedure
Geometric Constraints You can apply several different types of geometric constraints to your sketch geometry. Each constraint type offers a unique capability and is used to create a specific constraint condition. In this lesson you learn about the different constraints available and how they can be used.
Access Methods The following methods can be used to access the 2D geometric constraints. 2D Sketch Panel
Shortcut Menu
In the graphics window, right-click and click Create Constraint.
The following image shows the 2D geometric constraints available from the 2D Sketch Panel.
Available Geometric Constraints
Constraint
Potential Sketch Elements Line
Constraint Condition Created Constrained geometry is perpendicular to each other
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
99
Constraint
100
Potential Sketch Elements
Constraint Condition Created
Line
Constrained geometry is parallel to each other
Line, Circle, Arc
Constrained geometry is tangent to each other
Line, Point, Endpoint of Line, Center Point
Constrains two points together; Can constraint a line to a point
Circle, Arc
Constrains circles or arcs to share the same center point location
Lines, Ellipse Axes
Constrains the geometry to lie along the same line
Lines, Pairs of Points (including Midpoints)
Constrains the geometry to lie parallel to the X axis of the sketch coordinate system
Lines, Pairs of Points (including Midpoints)
Constrains the geometry to lie parallel to the Y axis of the sketch coordinate system
Lines, Circles, Arcs
Constrains the geometry to have equal radii or lines to have the same length
Lines, Points, Circles, Arcs
Constrains the geometry to fixed at its current position relative to the sketch coordinate system
Lines, Points, Circles, Arcs
Constrains geometry to be symmetrical about a selected centerline
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
Applying Constraints - Process Overview The following steps present an overview to applying different types of geometric constraints. In the exercise portion of this lesson, you have an opportunity to place additional types of constraints. Apply a Horizontal Constraint 1.
On the Panel Bar, click the Horizontal constraint tool and select the geometry to be constrained.
Apply an Equal Constraint 1. 2.
On the Panel Bar, click the Equal constraint tool. Select a circle, line, or arc.
3.
Select the circle, line, or arc to apply the Equal constraint.
4.
The selected geometry is now constrained to be Equal in size.
Apply a Horizontal Constraint between a point and a midpoint 1.
On the Panel Bar, click the Horizontal constraint tool.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
101
2.
Select a point such as the endpoint of a line or center of a circle.
3.
Select the midpoint of an existing line.
The geometry is now constrained horizontally based upon the two points selected.
102
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
Apply a Symmetrical Constraint 1. 2.
On the Panel Bar, click the Symmetric constraint tool. Select the first sketch element for the constraint.
3.
Select the second sketch element for the constraint.
4.
Select a sketch element to be used for the symmetry line. Tip: You only need to select the symmetry line once during the current session of the Symmetric Constraint tool.
5.
Continue selecting other sketch elements to apply the Symmetric constraint.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
103
Planning Constraints As you create sketch geometry, constraints are automatically applied. However, those constraints do not always completely represent your design intent. Therefore, you must add constraints or delete existing constraints. Concept
In this lesson you learn how to plan constraints for your 2D sketch geometry. Following are some key concepts regarding constraint planning.
104
•
Determine sketch dependencies. During the sketch creation process, determine how sketch elements relate to each other and apply the appropriate sketch constraints.
•
Analyze automatically applied constraints. As you create sketch geometry, some constraints are automatically applied. After the sketch is created, you should determine whether any degrees of freedom remain on the sketch. If required, delete the automatically applied constraints and apply constraints to remove the degrees of freedom.
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
•
Use only needed constraints. When you apply constraints to your sketch geometry, take into account the design intent and the degrees of freedom remaining on the sketch. It is not necessary to fully constrain sketch geometry in order to create 3D features. In some situations you may be required to leave sketch geometry underconstrained. You can use the constraint-drag technique to see the remaining degrees of freedom on the sketch.
•
Stabilize shape before size. Before you place dimensions on your sketch elements, you should constrain the sketch to prevent the geometry from distorting. As you place the parametric dimensions, the sketch elements update to reflect the correct size. By stabilizing the geometry with constraints, you will be able to predict the effect the dimensions will have on the sketch geometry. If necessary use the Fix constraint to fix portions of the sketch.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
105
106
•
Place dimensions on large elements before small ones. By placing dimensions on larger elements first, you can minimize distortion on the sketch as it updates to reflect the dimensioned values.
•
Use both geometric constraints and dimensions. It is important to understand that constraints and dimensions work together to constrain the geometry. Some constraint combinations may distort underconstrained portions of your sketch. By using a combination of geometric constraints and parametric dimensions, you can correct this distortion and generate a sketch that is properly constrained and meets your design intent.
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
•
Identify sketch elements that might change size. When constraining sketches, take into account features that may change as the design evolves. When you identify sketch features that may change, leave those features underconstrained. This will allow the feature to change as the design evolves. In the case of adaptive parts, you will intentionally leave features underconstrained to enable them to adapt to other parts in the assembly.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
107
Showing and Deleting Constraints As you create and constrain your 2D sketches, you may need to view and possibly delete some constraints. The Show Constraints tool enables you to view the constraints applied to the selected geometry and if necessary, select the constraint(s) and delete them. Procedure
Access Methods The following method can be used to access the Show/Delete Constraints tool. 2D Sketch Panel
Show/Delete Constraints Toolbar
Viewing Constraints. On the Show Constraints toolbar, click the constraint. The geometry referenced by the selected constraint will be highlighted. Deleting Constraints. On the Show Constraints toolbar, select the constraint symbol and press DELETE, or right-click the selected constraint and click Delete. Lock the Constraint Toolbar. Click the PushPin icon on the Show Constraints toolbar to leave the toolbar displayed until you close it.
108
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
Process Overview The following steps present an overview for using the Show/Delete Constraints tool. 1. 2.
On the Panel Bar, click the Show Constraints tool. Pause over, or select the geometry. Pausing over the geometry will display the Show Constraints toolbar temporarily until you move your cursor away from the toolbar. Selecting the geometry will display the toolbar permanently until you close it. You can lock the temporary toolbar by selecting the PushPin icon.
Show Constraints Toolbar - Temporary Mode
Show Constraints Toolbar - Locked Mode
3.
Select the constraint symbol to view the geometry referenced by the constraint.
4.
To delete the constraint, press DELETE, or right-click the constraint symbol and click Delete.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
109
Show All Constraints The Show All Constraints tool enables you to see all constraints applied to the active sketch geometry. When you select the Show All Constraints tool, Show/Delete Constraint toolbars are displayed next to each sketch element. Pause over or select the constraint symbol to highlight the constrained geometry. Select the constraint symbol and press DELETE to delete the constraint. Procedure
Access Methods The following methods can be used to access the Show All Constraints tool. Shortcut Menu
Right-click in the graphics window and click Show All Constraints. (Sketch must be active.)
Keyboard Shortcut
F8 - Show all constraints F9 - Hide all constraints
The Constraint toolbars will appear next to each sketch element. Click and drag on the vertical bars of the toolbars to move them to another location.
Sketch Showing All Constraints
110
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
Use Construction Geometry in the Sketch There may be times when you need to place geometry in your sketch that you do not want to be included in the 3D feature. To do this, you create, constrain, and dimension construction geometry just like any other 2D sketch geometry but when a 3D feature is created, the construction geometry is ignored. Concept
You can use construction geometry as a reference for dimensions to other normal sketch geometry as well as to constrain normal sketch geometry. In this lesson you learn how to create and constrain construction geometry.
Access Methods Use the following method to access the Construction geometry style. Standard Toolbar
In the following image below, construction lines are used to position the slot from the center of the circle and along the angled construction line.
Sketch Containing Construction Geometry
Process Overview - Creating Construction Geometry The following steps present an overview for creating construction geometry. 1.
Create a new sketch or activate an existing sketch.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
111
2.
On the Standard toolbar, select Construction from the Styles drop-down list.
3.
On the Sketch Panel Bar, click one of the sketch tools to create the geometry. As you sketch the geometry it will be created as construction geometry.
4.
To switch back to normal geometry creation, on the Standard toolbar, select Normal from the Styles drop-down list.
5.
Continue sketching geometry as required.
6.
Constrain and dimension the geometry as required.
Converting Normal Geometry to Construction Geometry Tip
112
You can convert normal geometry to construction geometry by selecting the geometry, then on the Standard Toolbar in the Styles drop-down list, select Construction.
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
Exercise: Constraining Sketches In this exercise, you create and constrain sketch geometry. Using the concepts and procedures learned in this lesson, you create and constrain both normal and construction geometry. Sketched features are used in this exercise. More information on these features is presented in the next chapter. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching, click Exercise: Constraining Sketches
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Simple Part with Constrained Sketches
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
113
Dimensioning Sketches Overview Overview
Overview Dimensioning your sketches is a major part of constraining the 2D geometry. While geometric constraints stabilize the sketch and make it predictable, dimensions size the sketch according to your design intent. In this lesson you learn how to create and use various types of dimensions on your 2D sketch geometry.
3D Part with Parametric Dimensions
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
114
•
Create various types of parametric dimensions
•
Create and use driven dimensions on your sketch
•
Use additional options when applying dimensions
•
Create and apply dimensions to your sketch using the Automatic Dimensioning tool
•
Use different formats when displaying dimensions on your sketch
•
Understand best practices for dimensioning your sketch
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
Parametric Dimensions Adding parametric dimensions is the final step in fully constraining your sketch geometry. When you apply a parametric dimension to a sketch element, the sketch element changes size to reflect the value of the dimension. Procedure
Unlike 2D CAD applications where dimensions are simply numeric representations of the size of the geometry, in a parametric 3D modeling application, dimensions are used to drive the size of the geometry. This technology enables you to quickly change a dimension and immediately see the effect the change has on the geometry. Several types of parametric dimensions are available but only one dimension tool is used to create them. Autodesk Inventor places the appropriate type of dimension based on the geometry that you select. When placing dimensions, the shortcut menu displays additional options for placing the dimension.
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the General Dimension tool: Standard Toolbar
Keyboard Shortcut
D
The following image shows various types of dimensions that you can apply to sketch geometry.
Sketch Elements with Various Dimensions
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
115
Process Overview - Applying Parametric Dimensions This section presents the processes for applying different types of parametric dimensions. Linear Dimension: a. On the Panel Bar, click the General Dimension tool. b. Select the sketch element for the linear dimension and follow the sequence below.
Place the dimension
Select the dimension and enter a new value
Geometry changes to reflect new dimension
c.
Right−click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu, or continue placing additional dimensions. Radial/Diameter Dimension: a. On the Panel Bar, click the General Dimension tool. b. Select the sketch element for the radial/diameter dimension and follow the sequence below.
Place the dimension
c.
116
Select the dimension and enter a new value
Geometry changes to reflect new dimension
Right−click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu, or continue placing additional dimensions.
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
Angular Dimension: a. On the Panel Bar, click the General Dimension tool. b. Select the sketch each element for the angular dimension and follow the sequence below. c. When creating an angular dimension select each line at a point on other than their endpoints.
Place the dimension
Select the dimension and enter a new value
Geometry changes to reflect new dimension
d.
Right−click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu, or continue placing additional dimensions. Aligned Dimension: a. On the Panel Bar, click the General Dimension tool. b. Select the sketch element for the aligned dimension and follow the sequence below.
Position the cursor near the geometry. Click when the Aligned Dimension icon is displayed
Place the dimension
Select the dimension and enter a new value
Geometry changes to reflect new dimension
c.
Right−click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu, or continue placing additional dimensions. Tip: You could also right-click before positioning the dimension and click Aligned on the shortcut menu to set the dimension type as an Aligned dimension.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
117
Entering Values Autodesk Inventor understands specific units of measurement such as millimeter, centimeter, meter, inch, and foot. It is not necessary to enter the suffix of the default unit. If your part consists of multiple units of measurement you must enter the non-default unit suffixes. For example, if the default unit of measurement is millimeters, you would enter a value of 50 millimeters as 50 with no suffix. To specify a value of 50 centimeters in the same part, you would enter 50 cm. Autodesk Inventor evaluates the values as you enter them. Values shown in red indicate an improper value or format, while values shown in black are considered to be valid. Unit suffixes and parameters are case-sensitive. When you enter a unit suffix, it must be entered in lowercase. For example 50 cm would be evaluated correctly while 50 CM is not valid.
Additional Dimension Options The following list represents additional options available on the shortcut menu when you place dimensions.
118
•
Display Edit Dimension dialog box automatically: While placing a dimension, right-click in the graphics window and on the shortcut menu, click Edit Dimension. With this option set, the Edit Dimension dialog box will appear automatically after each dimension is placed.
•
Radial/Diameter dimension options: When you place a dimension on a arc or circle, right-click in the graphics window and on the shortcut menu, click Diameter or Radius to switch the default mode of the current dimension. When dimensioning an arc, the default mode is Radius. When dimensioning a circle, the default mode is Diameter.
•
Linear dimension options: When you place a linear dimension to a line or
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
two points at an angle, right-click in the graphics window and on the shortcut menu, click the desired dimension type.
•
Dimensioning to quadrants: When you need to place a dimension to the quadrant of a circle, place the cursor near the quadrant and look for the quadrant dimension glyph. Select the arc or circle at the point where the glyph appears.
Dimensions Stored as Parameters Each dimension you create is automatically named and stored as a parameter in the current part file. Selecting the Parameters tool will display the Parameters dialog box listing the Model Parameters.
Dimensions Listed as Model Parameters
Notice the parameter names d3, d4, d5 and so on. These names are automatically generated each time a dimension is placed. If you delete a dimension, its parameter is also deleted and the original dimension name is not used again in the current part file. You can rename the default dimension names and modify their values in the Parameters dialog box.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
119
Driven Dimensions As you apply dimensions to your sketch geometry, these dimensions will be parametric by default. Each parametric dimension you apply reduces the degrees of freedom available on each sketch. Once all the degrees of freedom have been removed, the sketch is considered fully constrained and you are not allowed to place any additional constraints or parametric dimensions. Principle
You create driven dimensions with the same dimension tool used for parametric dimensions. However, when you create a driven dimension, you must set the dimension style to Driven. On the Standard toolbar, from the Styles drop-down list, select Driven. This option is available only if the General Dimension tool is active or one or more existing dimensions are currently selected. Unlike parametric dimensions which force the geometry to change size based on the dimension value, driven dimensions are driven by the geometry. The value of a driven dimension changes if the geometry it has been applied to changes. Because driven dimensions do not force the geometry to change, they do not remove any degrees of freedom from the sketch.
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the General Dimension tool and apply driven dimensions. Standard Toolbar
Keyboard Shortcut
D
Fully Constrained Sketch Containing a Driven Dimension
120
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
Automatic Driven Dimensions Note
As you place dimensions on your sketch, if you attempt to apply a dimension that would overconstrain the sketch, you will be given the option to create the dimension as a driven dimension. Click Accept to create a driven dimension based on your selection.
Additional Options for Applying Dimensions When you apply dimensions to your sketch elements, additional options such as tolerances, are available, enabling you to control the display of the dimensions. Also available are tools designed to assist you in creating dimensions referenced from other features and/or dimensions. Procedure
Referencing Other Dimensions When you create a new dimension, you can reference an existing dimension by selecting the dimension in the graphics window. The dimension parameter name is automatically entered in the Edit Dimension dialog box.
The preceding image shows dimension d25 being created equal to dimension d24. When you want to reference other dimensions in a new dimension, with the Edit Dimension dialog box open, select an existing dimension to reference. The cursor
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
121
changes to indicate that you are referencing an existing dimension. When you select the existing dimension, the parameter name of the dimension you selected is entered in the Edit Dimension dialog box.
Edit Dimension Dialog Box - Flyout Options When applying parametric dimensions, the following options are available on the Edit Dimension flyout.
Edit Dimension Flyout
Measure: Enables you to measure another sketch element or 3D feature. The resulting value is placed in the Edit Dimension dialog box. Show Dimensions: Enables you to select a feature on the 3D part to display the underlying dimensions. After the dimensions are displayed you can select a dimension for use in the existing dimension. The dimension being referenced can be used alone or in a formula. Tolerance: Displays the Tolerance dialog box enabling you to assign a tolerance to the parametric dimension. List Parameters: Lists the current User Parameters in a window, enabling you to select a User Parameter for use in the current dimension. This option appears only if User Parameters have been created. Recently Used Values: Displays a list of recently used values. Select any value for use in the current dimension.
122
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
Automatic Dimensioning The Auto Dimension tool applies constraints and dimensions to the entire sketch or only those sketch elements that are selected. The Auto Dimension tool is intended to be used in conjunction with the General Dimension tool and manually added or inferred constraints. Procedure
For best results you should apply constraints and any dimensions you would prefer not be automatically calculated. Although you can use the tool to dimension all sketch elements automatically by not selecting any elements and clicking the Apply button, you should select the geometry based on how you want the automatic dimensions applied.
Access Methods Use the following method to access the Auto Dimension tool. Standard Toolbar
Auto Dimension Dialog Box
The following options are available in the Auto Dimension dialog box: Curves: Select the sketch elements to be automatically dimensioned. If no sketch elements are selected, all elements are considered for dimensioning. Dimensions: When selected, applies dimensions to the sketch elements. Constraints: When selected, applies constraints to the sketch elements. Dimensions Required: Displays the number of dimensions required to fully constrain the sketch. Manually applied dimensions and/or constraints will affect this number. Tip: When this number is 2, consider using at least one fix constraint or constrain the geometry to the origin of the sketch. Apply: Applies dimensions and constraints to the selected geometry. Remove: Removes the dimensions and/or constraints applied by the Auto Dimension tool. This will not remove dimensions and/or constraints that you applied manually.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
123
Done: Closes the dialog box.
Process Overview - Automatic Dimensioning The following steps represent an overview for using the Auto Dimension tool.
124
1.
Create a new sketch and add the constraints and dimensions that you prefer not be automatically calculated. Notice the constraints that have been added manually. This ensures that critical constraints do not need to be automatically calculated.
2.
On the Panel Bar, click the Auto Dimension tool and select the geometry to be automatically dimensioned.
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
3.
In the Auto Dimension dialog box, click the Apply button to apply dimensions and constraints to the selected geometry. Click Done to close the dialog box.
4.
Move the dimensions as required to clean up the automatic placement.
5.
Use standard dimension editing techniques to adjust the dimension values as required.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
125
Displaying Dimensions You can control how dimensions are displayed in the graphics window by using different dimension display options. While in an active sketch, right-click in the graphics window and on the shortcut menu, click Dimension Display. You then select a dimension display option. Procedure
Dimension Display Options
The following options are available on the Dimension Display submenu: Value: Dimension is displayed as nominal value.
Name: Dimension is displayed as a parameter name.
Expression: Dimension is displayed as an expression.
126
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
Tolerance: Dimension is displayed with tolerance values.
Precise Value: Dimension is displayed as precise value regardless of precision setting.
Guidelines for Dimensioning Sketches Consider the following guidelines when adding dimensions to your sketch: Principle
•
Use the General Dimension tool to place critical dimensions, and then use the Auto Dimension tool to speed up the dimensioning process.
•
Use geometric constraints when possible. For example, place a perpendicular constraint instead of an angle dimension of 90 degrees.
•
Place large dimensions before small ones.
•
Incorporate relationships between dimensions. For example, if two dimensions are supposed to be the same value, reference one dimension to the other. With this relationship, if the first dimension changes, the other dimension changes as well.
•
Consider both dimensional and geometric constraints to meet the overall design intent.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
127
Exercise: Dimensioning Sketches In this exercise, you apply dimensions to a sketch. Using the techniques learned in this lesson, apply a combination of parametric and driven dimensions to the sketch geometry. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching, click Exercise: Dimensioning Sketches
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
3D Part with Parametric Dimensions
128
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Sketching Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Sketching Print Exercise Reference
In this exercise, you create a new part file and using the techniques and concepts learned in this chapter, create, constrain, and dimension a sketch as show here.
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching, click Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Sketching
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Fully Constrained and Dimensioned Sketch
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
129
Chapter Summary Summary
You learned the following in this chapter: Summary
130
•
Basic rules for creating sketches.
•
How to create and edit 2D sketches.
•
Fix common problems associated with sketches.
•
How to constrain 2D sketches in Autodesk Inventor.
•
About the types of constraints available and what types of geometry they can be applied to.
•
How to use construction geometry when creating 2D sketches.
•
How to apply parametric dimension to 2D sketches.
•
What makes parametric and driven dimensions different.
•
How to display dimensions
•
Guidelines and best practices for dimensioning sketches.
Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching
Creating Simple Sketched Features Chapter Introduction
In this chapter
In this chapter you learn about...
After completing this chapter, you will be able to...
•
Sketched features.
•
Base and secondary features.
•
Consumed and unconsumed sketches.
•
Creating profiles containing multiple closed loops.
•
Sharing sketch geometry.
•
Creating sketch planes.
•
Using part faces to define a sketch
•
Application options that enable you to automatically project edges on a new sketch.
•
Using the Extrude tool to create extruded features.
•
The Join, Cut, and Intersect feature relationships.
•
Specifying different termination options for extrude features
• •
•
Create sketches and profiles for use in sketch features.
•
Use the Sketch tool to create new sketches.
•
Use existing part faces to define new sketch planes.
•
Create reference geometry from existing part geometry.
•
Create extruded features using the Extrude tool.
•
Specify termination options when you create extruded features.
Editing features after you have created them.
•
Edit extruded features.
Using the Revolve tool to create revolved features.
•
Create revolved features using the Revolve tool.
•
Edit revolved features.
Introduction to Sketched Features Overview Overview
Overview Three-dimensional (3D) features that you create in Autodesk Inventor fall into one of two categories: sketched features or placed features. The term "sketched feature" refers to a 3D feature that is based on a 2D sketch. In this lesson you learn the concept of sketched features and how they are created.
Part Created Using a Single Shared Sketch
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to
132
•
Understand the concept of simple sketched features
•
Identify consumed and unconsumed sketches in your model
•
Identify the two different types of profiles and options for working with closed loop profiles
•
Share sketch features
Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features
Simple Sketched Features As the name implies, sketched features are 3D features that are created from an existing 2D sketch. These features serve as the basis for most of your designs using Autodesk Inventor. When you create a sketched feature, you begin by first creating the sketch or profile for the 3D feature. For simple sketched features, this profile usually represents a 2D section of the 3D feature being created. For more complex sketched features, multiple sketches can be created and used within one sketch feature. Simple Sketched Features - Concept
You create your 3D model by using multiple sketches representing various profiles of the 3D part and building on those sketches with sketch features. The first sketch feature you create is considered the base feature. After you create the base feature, additional sketched and/or placed features are added to the 3D model. As you add the additional sketched features, options are available that control whether the secondary sketched features will add or remove material from the existing 3D geometry.
Typical Sketched Feature Creation The image below represents a typical workflow for creating a 3D part based upon sketched features. The base sketch is created which is used to create the base feature. Secondary sketches and features are then added to the 3D model.
Creation of Sketched Features
Sketched Feature Attributes The key attributes of sketched features are as follows: •
Requires an unconsumed sketch.
•
Used for both base and secondary features.
•
The result of the sketched feature can add or remove mass from the 3D geometry.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
133
Consumed and Unconsumed Sketches When you create a new part, the initial sketch is created for you automatically. In most cases you use this default sketch for the basis of your 3D geometry. After the sketch is created, you create a sketched feature, such as Extrude or Revolve, to create 3D geometry from the initial sketch. When you create the 3D sketched feature, the sketch itself becomes consumed by the 3D sketched feature. Prior to this time, the sketch is considered unconsumed and can be used for any sketched feature.
Unconsumed Sketch The image below shows the initial sketch before it is consumed by the sketched feature.
Unconsumed Sketch
Consumed Sketches The following image shows sketches consumed by the sketched features. In the browser, the sketches are nested below the sketched feature in which they were used.
Consumed Sketches
134
Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features
Options for Consumed Sketches After the sketch has been consumed, you still have access to the sketch for editing and other operations. In the browser, right-click on the sketch to access these options.
Sketch Shortcut Menu
The following options are available on the Sketch shortcut menu: Edit Sketch: Activates the sketch environment for editing. Any changes you make to the sketch are reflected in the 3D geometry. Redefine: Enables you to redefine the plane on which the sketch was created. Any changes you make are reflected in the 3D geometry. Share Sketch: Shares the sketch making it available for additional sketch features. Edit Coordinate System: Activates the sketch enabling you to adjust the sketch coordinate system. For example, you could change the direction of the current X or Y axes, or reposition the sketch origin. Create Note: Attaches a note to the sketch using the Engineer's Notebook interface. Visibility: When a sketch is consumed by a feature, its visibility is automatically turned off. This option sets the visibility of the sketch to On.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
135
Sketches and Profiles When you create sketches it is possible to create sketch geometry that contains multiple profiles. There are two different types of profiles: open and closed. Closed profiles are the most common and are used to create 3D geometry. Open profiles are used to create paths and surfaces and can also appear as the result of projecting reference geometry. Concept
As you build more complex sketches, you may end up with multiple closed loop profiles. In this situation you have one sketch containing multiple closed profiles. The closed profiles in some cases may intersect each other. When you create sketched features from these types of profiles, you are able to select any individual closed profile or multiple closed profiles to be included in the feature.
Multiple Closed Loop Profiles In the following image, a sketch containing multiple closed loop profiles is used to create an extruded feature. In the bottom image, note the ability to select only the profiles you want included in the sketched feature.
Sketch Containing Multiple Closed Loop Profiles
136
Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features
Sharing Sketch Features You can reuse an existing sketch after it as been consumed by the sketched feature--this is referred to as sharing a sketch. If your sketch contains geometry that is meant to define separate features on the part, you can share the sketch thereby making it available for additional sketched features. Sharing Sketch Features - Procedure
Under certain circumstances, sharing the sketch is an alternative to creating multiple sketches. When you share the sketch its geometry becomes available for an unlimited number of additional sketched features.
Access Methods Use the following method to share a sketch. Shortcut Menu
In the Browser, right-click on a consumed sketch and click Share Sketch.
Shortcut Menu - Share Sketch
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
137
The following image shows a sketch that has been shared and is being used in two sketched features.
Part/Assembly Browser - Shared Sketch
•
The hand indicates the sketch has been shared.
•
The icon is colored indicating that the sketch (and any dimensions added) will remain visible, even after being consumed by the sketched feature.
•
You must manually turn off visibility for a shared sketch.
Share with Caution! Tip
138
Before you share a sketch, be certain this is the method you want to use to accomplish your design intent. After you share a sketch, there is no way to "un-share" or delete the shared sketch.
Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features
Exercise: Introduction to Sketched Features In this exercise, you create some simple sketched features from a sketch consisting of multiple closed loop profiles. You then share the sketch to make it available for additional features. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features, click Exercise: Introduction to Sketched Features
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Part Created Using a Single Shared Sketch
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
139
Working with Sketch Planes Overview Overview
Overview Every sketch you create defines a 2D plane on which your sketch geometry is created. In this lesson you learn how to work with sketch planes, and you learn about creating and referencing sketch geometry.
Completed Pillar Block
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to
140
•
Use the Sketch tool to create new sketch planes
•
Define a new sketch plane based upon an existing part face
•
Reference existing model edge geometry when you create sketches
•
Create reference geometry
Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features
The Sketch Tool You use the Sketch tool to create new sketches or to activate existing sketches. When you select the Sketch tool on the Standard toolbar, you are prompted to select a plane to create a sketch or an existing sketch to edit. You can select planes or sketches in the graphics window or in the browser. Procedure
Standard Toolbar
Using the Sketch Tool The following examples show potential uses of the Sketch tool. •
Activate an existing sketch On the Standard toolbar, click the Sketch tool and in the browser, select an existing sketch.
The existing sketch is activated for editing.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
141
•
Create a new sketch On the Standard toolbar, click the Sketch tool and select a plane or face on the part.
A new sketch is created, aligned to the selected face.
142
•
To exit the sketch, use one of the following methods:
•
On the Standard toolbar, click the Sketch tool or
•
On the Standard toolbar, click the Return button or,
•
Right-click in the graphics window and click Finish Sketch on the shortcut menu.
Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features
Using a Part Face to Define a Sketch One of the most common methods for creating new sketches is to use a part face to define your sketch plane. You can create new sketch planes on any flat surface of an existing part. Using this method, the new sketch plane can be created directly on the selected face or offset from the selected face to a specified distance. Procedure
Standard Toolbar
Shortcut Menu
Right-click on a part face and click New Sketch.
Creating Sketch Planes on a Part Face The following examples demonstrate how to create sketch planes on a part face. •
Create a new sketch plane aligned to a selected face Right-click on a face of the part click New Sketch on the shortcut menu.
The sketch plane is created on the selected face.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
143
•
Create a new sketch plane, offset from a selected face 1.On the Standard toolbar, click the Sketch tool 2.Click on the face and drag the sketch plane away from the selected face. An offset dialog box is displayed.
3.In the Offset dialog box, enter a value for the offset and click the green checkmark. The sketch plane is created offset from the selected face at the distance you specified.
144
Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features
Direct Model Edge Referencing Direct model edge referencing refers to a process in which you reference existing model edge geometry in the creation of new sketch geometry. When you create new sketch planes on existing model faces, the edges of the selected face are automatically projected onto the new sketch. This geometry is known as reference geometry. Without this reference geometry, it would be otherwise impossible to dimension or constrain new sketch geometry to existing features on the 3D part. Procedure
Uses for Direct Model Edge References Following are potential uses for edge references: •
For dimensions to new sketch geometry
•
For relational constraints to new sketch geometry
•
As the basis for new sketched features
Application Options - Sketch Tab When you select the Autoproject Edges for Sketch Creation and Edit option on the Sketch tab in the Options dialog box, the edges of the selected face are projected onto the new sketch when you create a new sketch plane on an existing face.
Options Dialog Box - Sketch Tab
Referencing Model Edge Geometry The following examples demonstrate how to reference model edge geometry when creating new sketches. •
Create a new sketch on an existing part face. The edges of the existing part face
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
145
are automatically projected onto the new sketch.
Create new sketch geometry and use the projected reference geometry for dimensions and/or constraints.
•
Direct model edge referencing in the context of an assembly:
•
Create a new sketch on a face of the active part.
On the Panel Bar, click the Project Geometry tool and select a face on another part in the assembly. The new sketch geometry is created by projected the edges of the selected face. Note the appearance of the Adaptive indicator. This icon indicates the feature is adaptive to the referenced part in the assembly. If the source geometry projected onto the new sketch changes, this feature will automatically update to reflect the changes. This concept is known as
146
Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features
Adaptivity and is covered in greater detail later in this course.
To demonstrate Adaptivity, the source geometry on the first part in the assembly has been modified. As a result, the projected geometry updates to reflect the changes in the source part.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
147
Creating Reference Geometry You cannot draw reference geometry. The only way to create it is by using the Project Geometry tool. When you select this tool, you are prompted to select geometry to project onto the current sketch plane. As you select the geometry, it is projected onto the current sketch plane and is created as reference geometry. Procedure
When you project geometry from the same part, it is always associative to the original source geometry. If the source geometry changes, the reference geometry will also change. If you project geometry from another part in the assembly, the geometry is associative only if the Cross Part Geometry Projection option is selected. This option is found on the Assembly tab in the Options dialog box. If this option is not selected, the reference geometry is still created, however, it is not associative to the original source geometry. Adaptivity is beyond the scope of this chapter but is covered in greater detail later in this course.
Access Methods You can use the following tools to create reference geometry: Panel Bar
Panel Bar
Reference Geometry Attributes Following are some key attributes for reference geometry:
148
•
Can be used as the basis for dimensions to new sketch geometry
•
Can be used to apply relational constraints to new sketch geometry
•
Cannot be dimensioned
•
Cannot be trimmed
•
Can be mirrored
•
Cannot be drawn; can only be created by using Project Geometry tool or by selecting the Autoproject Edges option
Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features
Application Options - Assembly Tab With the Enable Associative Edge/Loop Geometry Projection During In-Place Modeling option selected on the Assembly tab in the Options dialog box, projecting geometry from other parts in the assembly will create associative (adaptive) reference geometry.
Applications Options Dialog Box - Assembly Tab
Application Options - Sketch Tab When the Autoproject Edges During Curve Creation option is selected, you can autoproject geometry by hovering the pointer over the geometry to be projected while sketching.
Application Options - Sketch Tab
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
149
Sketching Shortcut Menu While sketching, right-click in the graphics window and click AutoProject on the shortcut menu. This will enable you to hover over geometry to automatically project onto the current sketch plane.
Shortcut Menu - AutoProject
Creating Reference Geometry - Process Overview The following procedures represent an overview for creating reference geometry.
150
1.
Create a new sketch on the existing part.
2.
On the Panel Bar, click the Project Geometry tool and select the geometry to project onto the current sketch.
Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features
To autoproject geometry during curve creation: 1.
Create a new sketch on the existing part.
2.
Begin sketching the required geometry. Right-click in the graphics window and click AutoProject on the shortcut menu.
3.
Hover over the geometry to project. It will be automatically projected to the current sketch plane.
4.
Continue sketching the required geometry as required. Tip: You may consider turning off the AutoProject option until it is needed again. This will prevent the accidental projection of geometry while sketching over existing part features.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
151
Exercise: Working with Sketch Planes In this exercise, you create several sketched features based upon different sketch planes. For each sketch you will be required to create reference geometry and use direct model edge referencing. Print Exercise Reference
Note: Some 3D features are used in this exercise that will be covered in greater depth later in the course.
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features, click Exercise: Working with Sketch Planes
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Completed Pillar Block
152
Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features
Creating Extruded Features Overview Overview
Overview One of the most common sketched features is the extruded feature. As you create these features you can adjust the feature relationship options for Join, Cut, and Intersect. After the feature is created, you can also edit the underlying sketch profiles used in the extruded feature. In this lesson you learn how to create extruded features using different termination options and how to edit the feature and profiles used to create them.
Index Slide
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to •
Understand extruded features and how to create them
•
Use the Extrude tool to create extruded features
•
Understand the concept of using the Join, Cut, and Intersect options when you create extruded features
•
Use the various termination options when you create extruded features
•
Edit extruded features and the profiles used to create them
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
153
Overview of Extruded Features An extruded feature is a sketched feature in which a profile is extruded to a distance specified by a value or based upon different termination options. If the profile being extruded is closed, you can choose between a solid or surface for the result of the extrusion. If the profile being extruded is open, the extrusion will result in a surface. Procedure
Although it is possible to taper the faces of the extruded feature, the extrusion direction is always perpendicular to the sketch profile being used.
Examples of Simple Extruded Profiles In this example, the sketch contains multiple closed loop profiles selected to form a single extruded feature.
Example of Extruded Features
In this example, the sketch contains multiple closed loop profiles selected to form a single extruded feature with holes.
Example of Extruded Feature
154
Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features
The Extrude Tool You use the Extrude tool to create extruded features from existing sketch profiles. Considered a sketched feature, extrude features require an unconsumed and visible sketch to be available. If the sketch contains a single closed profile, that profile is selected automatically when you start the Extrude tool. If the sketch contains more than one profile, you are required to select the profiles to be included in the extruded feature. Procedure
Extrude Tool - Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Extrude tool. Panel Bar
Shortcut Menu
The Extrude dialog box is opened when you start the Extrude tool.
Extrude Dialog Box
The following features and options are available in the Extrude dialog box: Profile: Click this button to select geometry to be included in the extrusion. A red arrow indicates that no profiles have been selected for the extrusion feature. Output: Specify the desired output option, Solid or Surface.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
155
Direction: Select the direction icon or click and drag the preview of the extrusion in the desired direction.
Creating Extruded Features - Process Overview Following is an overview of the process for creating extruded features.
156
1.
Create a new sketch.
2.
On the Panel Bar, click the Extrude tool. Adjust the options as required and click OK.
3.
The extruded feature is created.
Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features
4.
Create additional sketch geometry.
5.
On the Panel Bar, click the Extrude tool. Adjust the options as required and click OK.
6.
The additional extruded feature is added to the part.
7.
Create additional sketch geometry as required.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
157
158
8.
On the Panel Bar, click the Extrude tool. Adjust the options as required and click OK.
9.
The additional extruded feature is added to the part.
Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features
Feature Relationships - Join, Cut, and Intersect When you create extruded features you have the ability to adjust feature relationship options to control the effect of the current feature on existing features. These options are not available for the first feature of the part. Concept
The feature relationship options are available in the Extrude dialog box.
Dialog Box - Feature Relationship Options
Join: This option joins the result of the extruded feature being created to existing part geometry. Using this option results in material being added to the existing part. Note the green preview indicating material is being added.
Cut: This option cuts the result of the extruded feature being created from the existing part. Using this option results in material being removed from the existing part. Note the red preview indicating material is being removed.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
159
Intersect: This option removes material from the existing part by comparing the volume of the existing features and the feature being created and leaving only the volume shared between the existing features and the new feature. Note the blue preview indicating an Intersect relationship.
Specifying Termination When you create extruded features, you can specify termination options for the feature in the Extrude dialog box. Depending on the option you choose, different interface options are available. Specifying termination options enables you to control where the feature starts and ends. Procedure
Extrude Dialog Box - Termination Options
Distance: This option extrudes the profile according to the distance specified.
160
Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features
To Next: This option extrudes the profile to the next possible face or plane. Use the Terminator icon to select a solid or surface on which to terminate the extrusion.
To: This option extrudes the profile to terminate on the selected face or plane. If the selected termination face does not completely enclose the extrusion profile, select the extend face option to terminate the feature on the extended face.
From To: This option extrudes the profile by starting the extrusion at the face selected in the From option and ending the extrusion at the second face selected. If necessary, use the extend face options.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
161
All: This option extrudes the profile all the way through the part. If the part changes, the extruded feature will continue to go all the way through the part.
162
Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features
Editing Features After you create an extruded feature, you can edit it at any time. Because it is a sketched feature, there are two potential items that can be edited: the feature itself or the underlying sketch that was used to create the feature. When you edit the feature, you are presented with the same dialog box that you used when you created the feature. When you edit an extruded feature, you are able to change the parameters such as distance, feature relationships, and termination options and also reselect geometry to be included in the feature. Procedure
When you right-click on a feature, the shortcut menu is displayed. The following options are available on the Feature shortcut menu: Edit Feature: Select this option to open the Extrude dialog box. All options used in creating the feature can be modified. Edit Sketch: Select this option to activate the sketch for editing. All sketch tools are available for editing the geometry. While editing the sketch, you can change dimensions and constraints, and add or remove geometry from the sketch. All changes are reflected in the extruded feature. Depending on the changes made at the sketch level, you may be required to edit the extruded feature.
Feature Shortcut Menu
Editing Extrude Features - Process Overview Following is an overview of the process for editing extruded features. 1.
In the Browser, locate the feature you want to edit. To edit the sketch, right-click the feature and click Edit Sketch on the shortcut menu.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
163
164
2.
Using standard sketch tools, make the changes required to the sketch.
3. 4.
On the Standard toolbar, click the Return button to exit the sketch. In the Browser, right-click the feature and click Edit Feature on the shortcut menu.
5.
In the Extrude dialog box, adjust the options as required to edit the feature and click OK.
Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features
Exercise: Creating Extruded Features In this exercise, you will build an Index Slide part file using several extrude features. Some initial geometry has been created, while you will be required to create other sketch geometry. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features, click Exercise: Creating Extruded Features
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Index Slide
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
165
Creating Revolved Features Overview Overview
Overview You create revolved features by revolving a profile about an axis. As you create these features, you can adjust the feature relationship options for Join, Cut, and Intersect. After you create the feature, you can also edit the underlying sketch profiles used in the revolved feature. In this lesson you learn how to create revolved features using different feature relationship options and how to edit the feature and profiles used to create them.
Indexer Part File
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to
166
•
Understand revolved features and how to create them
•
Use the Revolve tool to create revolved features
•
Understand the concept of using the Join, Cut, and Intersect options when you create revolved features
•
Edit revolved features and the profiles used to create them
Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features
Overview of Revolved Features A revolved feature is a sketched feature in which a profile is revolved about an axis. You can revolve the profile at a full 360 degrees or at an angle specified. If the profile being extruded is closed, you can choose between a solid or surface for the result of the extrusion. If the profile being extruded is open, the extrusion results in a surface. Procedure
Examples of Simple Revolved Profiles In this example, the sketch contains a closed profile and one centerline. When you start the Extrude tool, the centerline is automatically selected as the axis of revolution.
Example of Revolved Features
In this example, the sketch contains a single closed loop profile, reference geometry, and one centerline. The profile is revolved with the Cut feature relationship.
Example of Revolved Feature
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
167
The Revolve Tool You use the Revolve tool to create revolved features from existing sketch profiles. The Revolve tool requires an unconsumed and visible sketch to be available. When you start the Revolve tool, if the sketch contains a single closed profile, that profile is selected automatically. If the sketch contains a centerline, it will be selected automatically as the axis for the revolved feature. If the sketch contains more than one profile, you are required to select the profiles to be included in the feature. Procedure
Revolve Tool - Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Revolve tool. Panel Bar
Shortcut Menu
Revolve Dialog Box
The following options are available in the Revolve dialog box: Profile: Click this button to select geometry to be included in the revolved feature. A red arrow indicates that no profiles have been selected for the revolved feature. Axis: Click this icon to select the line segment to use as the axis for the revolve feature. Tip: If the sketch contains a centerline it is selected automatically as the axis. Output: Select the desired output option: Solid or Surface. Extents: Select the desired option from the drop-down list. Angle: This option enables you to specify an angle and direction for the revolution.
168
Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features
Full: This option revolves the profile 360 degrees. Direction: Select the direction icon or click and drag the preview of the revolve in the desired direction. This option is available only if the Extents option is set to Angle.
Creating Revolved Features - Process Overview The following steps present an overview for creating revolved features. 1.
Create a new sketch containing a profile to revolve. If the profile is being revolved about a centerline, consider using the Centerline style on the line segment.
2.
On the Panel Bar, click the Revolve tool. In the Revolve dialog box, adjust the options as required and click OK.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
169
170
3.
Create additional sketch geometry as required.
4.
On the Panel Bar, click the Revolve tool. Select the geometry to be included in the revolved feature and adjust the options as required. Click OK.
Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features
Feature Relationships - Join, Cut, and Intersect When you create revolved features you have the ability to adjust feature relationship options to control the effect of the current feature on existing features. The feature relationship options are Join, Cut, and Intersect. These options are not available for the first feature of the part. Concept
Revolve Dialog Box - Feature Relationship Options
Join: This option joins the result of the revolved feature being created to existing part geometry. Using this option results in material being added to the existing part. Note the green preview indicating material is being added.
Cut: This option cuts the result of the revolved feature being created from the existing part. Using this option results in material being removed from the existing part. Note the red preview indicating material is being removed.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
171
Intersect: This option removes material from the existing part by comparing the volume of the existing features and the feature being created and leaving only the volume shared between the existing features and the new feature. Note the blue preview indicating an Intersect relationship.
172
Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features
Editing Features After the revolved feature is created, you can edit it at any time. Because it is a sketched feature, there are two potential items that can be edited: the feature itself or the underlying sketch that was used to create the feature. When you edit the feature, you are presented with the same dialog box that was used when you created the feature. When you edit a revolved feature, you are able to change the parameters such as angle and feature relationships, and also reselect geometry to be included in the feature. Procedure
The following options are available on the shortcut menu when you right-click on a revolved feature. Edit Feature: Displays the Revolve dialog box. All options used in creating the feature can be modified. Edit Sketch: Activates the sketch for editing. All sketch tools are available for editing the geometry. While editing the sketch, you can change dimensions and constraints, and even add or remove geometry from the sketch. All changes will be reflected in the revolved feature. Depending on the changes made at the sketch level, you may be required to edit the revolved feature.
Feature Shortcut Menu
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
173
Editing Revolve Features - Process Overview The following steps present an overview for editing revolved features.
174
1.
In the Browser, locate the feature you want to edit. Right-click the feature and click Edit Sketch on the shortcut menu.
2.
Using standard sketch tools, make the changes required to the sketch.
3. 4.
On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit the sketch. In the Browser, right-click the feature and click Edit Feature on the shortcut menu.
5.
In the Revolve dialog box, adjust the options as required and click OK.
Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features
Exercise: Creating Revolved Features In this exercise, you create a simple Indexer part file using the Revolve tool. The origin Z axis is projected on the first sketch and changed to a centerline. You use the Project Geometry and Project Cut Edges tools to create different profiles to be revolved. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features, click Exercise: Creating Revolved Features
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Indexer Part File
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
175
Challenge Exercise: Creating Simple Sketched Features Challenge Exercise: Creating Simple Sketched Features Print Exercise Reference
In this exercise, you create a 3D Rack Slide part using the dimensions and geometry shown below. Create a new part file and using the concepts and techniques learned in this chapter, create a 3D model of the geometry described below. Name your part file Rack-Slide.ipt.
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features, click Challenge Exercise: Creating Simple Sketched Features
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Rack Slide Dimensions
176
Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features
Chapter Summary Summary
You learned the following in this chapter: Summary
•
The concept of creating sketched features and sharing sketches.
•
How to identify consumed and unconsumed sketches.
•
To use the Sketch tool to create new sketches.
•
How to create new sketches on existing part faces.
•
Different ways to create reference geometry from existing part edges.
•
To create and edit extrude features using the Extrude tool.
•
The effect of feature relationships on geometry.
•
How to specify termination options when using the Extrude tool.
•
To create and edit revolve features using the Revolve tool.
•
The effect of feature relationships on geometry when using the Revolve tool.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
177
178
Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features
Introduction to Work Features Chapter Introduction
In this chapter
In this chapter you learn about...
After completing this chapter, you will be able to...
•
Locating and utilizing the default work planes.
•
Creating new work planes using several different methods.
•
Controlling the appearance of work planes
•
Editing work planes.
•
Locating and utilizing the default work axes
•
Create work axes.
•
Different methods for defining work axes.
•
Controlling the appearance of work axes.
•
Redefining a work axis after you have created it.
•
Locating and utilizing the default work point.
•
Creating work points.
•
Different methods for defining work points
•
Controlling the appearance of work points.
•
Redefining a work point after you have created it.
•
Locate and utilize the default work features.
•
Create work planes.
•
Create work axes.
•
Create work points.
•
Control the appearance of work features.
•
Redefine work features.
Work Planes Overview Overview
Overview Work planes are planes that extend infinitely. You can use them to assist in creating geometry, placing constraints, and completing other modeling tasks. There are two main types of work planes: default work planes and user-defined work planes. In this lesson you learn to create and use work planes.
Control Valve with Work Planes
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to
180
•
Locate, display and use the default work planes in part and assembly files
•
How to use the Work Plane tool to create additional work planes
•
Identify examples of work planes
•
Control the visibility of work planes.
Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features
Default Work Planes Every part and assembly file contains default work planes. These work planes are located in the Origin folder of the Part/Assembly Browser. The default work planes extend infinitely from the origin point. There are three default work planes, each representing a different coordinate plane. The three planes represented are the YZ plane, XZ plane, and XY plane. Concept
When you create a new part file, the initial sketch is created on one of these default planes. You can create additional sketches and/or features using the model or the default work planes.
Access Methods Use the following method to access the default work planes. Browser
Expand the Origin folder in the browser.
Default Work Planes
Potential Uses for Default Work Planes Following are some potential uses for default work planes:
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
181
•
Basis for new sketches
•
Basis for assembly constraints
•
Feature termination options
•
Basis for new work features
Default Work Plane - Appearance Properties
The following options are available to control the appearances of work planes.
182
•
Visibility: This property is off by default. Right-click on the work plane and click Visibility on the shortcut menu to turn on the work plane visibility.
•
Auto-Resize: This property is on by default and enables the visible size of the work plane to adjust according to the geometry in the current file. All work planes with this option enabled are resized equally. To prevent the work plane from resizing, select this option and clear the check mark. The following image represents the work plane size before and after creating geometry.
Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features
The Work Plane Tool You use the Work Plane tool to create work planes in the current part or assembly file. Work planes are used to define planar surfaces when the existing geometry does not represent the required plane. Work planes are parametrically attached to the model geometry and/or default work planes. When you create a work plane using features of existing geometry, if the geometry changes, the work plane will also change. For example, if you create a work plane that is tangent to a cylindrical surface with a radius of 2 mm, and that radius later changes to 5 mm, the work plane will move to retain the tangent relationship with the cylinder. Procedure
In the image below, the work plane is created at a 30 degree angle from part face. The circular extrusion is created from the work plane extruding to meet the part face. As the angle of the part face changes, the work plane updates to maintain the 30 degree angle, and circular feature changes with the work plane.
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Work Plane tool. Panel Bar
Keyboard Shortcut
]
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
183
Repeating the Work Plane Tool If you need to create multiple work planes, you can activate the Repeat Command option. While the Work Plane tool is active, right-click in the graphics window and click Repeat Command on the shortcut menu. The Work Plane tool is repeated until you cancel the command.
Process Overview - Creating Work Planes When you create work planes, the type of work plane is based completely on the geometry you select. For example, there is no dialog box to create a planar offset work plane. All work planes are created based on two or three selections. Each selection represents either an orientation or position. The following steps represent an example for creating a work plane that is aligned with the Origin XY plane and tangent to the outside of the cylinder.
184
1.
Select the feature or plane.
2.
Select the second feature or plane.
Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features
The resulting work plane is created.
Redefining Work Planes As you create work planes, they appear in the browser just like other parametric features, however they are not edited in the same way as other parametric features. If you right-click the work plane in the browser or graphics window, the Redefine Feature option is available. You can select this option to recreate the work plane using any valid method. Any geometry that was based on the work plane being redefined updates to reflect the changes in the work plane.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
185
Examples of Work Planes Several methods are available for creating work planes. When you create work planes, you select geometry and/or other work features. Each selection will define either orientation or position for the new work plane. Following are some of the most common methods used to create work planes. Concept
•
Aligned to origin plane/tangent to cylindrical surface
Selection 1 - Origin Work Plane
•
Selection 2 - Part Face
Result
Offset from plane or surface
Selection 1 - Click and drag from plane or surface
186
Result
Aligned to face/midpoint between two faces
Selection 1 - Part Face
•
Selection 2 - Cylindrical Surface
Selection 2 - Release the mouse and enter an offset distance
Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features
Result
•
Angle from face/along an edge
Selection 1 - Part Face
•
Selection 2 - Planar Surface on Part, Enter Angle
Result
Work plane on 3 points
Selection 1 - Vertex on Geometry
Selection 2 - Vertext on Geometry
Selection 3 - Vertex on Geometry
Result
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
187
•
Parallel to face/midpoint of edge
Selection 1 - Part Face
Selection 2 - Part Face
Result
Work Plane Appearance The appearance of work planes is controlled in a number of different ways. You can control the visibility of the work planes and move and/or resize them. Procedure
Controlling Global Visibility You can toggle the visibility of work features and sketches by using the options on this menu. Select the appropriate option or use the keyboard shortcuts.
View Menu > Object Visibility
Individual Work Plane Visibility To control individual work plane visibility, in the browser, right-click the work plane and click Visibility on the shortcut menu.
188
Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features
Resizing Work Planes Place your cursor over the corner of the work plane. When the resize indicator appears, click and drag the corner of the work plane to resize it.
Resizing Work Planes
Moving Work Planes Place your cursor over an edge of the work plane. When the move indicator appears, click and drag the work plane to a new location.
Moving Work Planes
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
189
Exercise: Work Planes In this exercise, you create a cylindrical control valve using both origin planes and work planes. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features, click Exercise: Work Planes
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Control Valve with Work Planes
190
Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features
Work Axes Overview Overview
Overview A work axis is an axis that extends infinitely and is used to assist you in creating geometry, placing constraints, and completing other modeling tasks. There are two main types of work axes: default work axes and user-defined work axes. In this lesson you learn to create and use work axes.
Simple Part Created Using Work Axes
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to •
Locate, display and use the default work axes in part and assembly files
•
Create additional work axes using the Work Axis tool
•
Identify examples of work axes
•
Control the visibility of work axes
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
191
Default Work Axes Every part and assembly file contains default work axes. These default work axes, located in the Origin folder of the Part/Assembly Browser, extend infinitely from the origin point. There are three default work axes, each representing a different coordinate axis. The three axes represented are the X axis, Y axis, and Z axis. Concept
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the default work axes. Browser
Expand the Origin folder and right-click on one of the default work axes.
Default Work Axes
192
Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features
Potential Uses for Default Work Axes Following are some potential uses for default work axes: •
Basis for assembly constraints
•
Axis of revolution for circular pattern
•
Basis for new work features
•
Representation of centerlines on sketches
Default Work Axes - Appearance Properties
Right-click on an origin axis to access the following options. •
Visibility: This property is off by default. Right-click on the work axis and click Visibility on the shortcut menu to turn on the work axis visibility.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
193
The Work Axis Tool The Work Axis tool is used to create work axes in the current part or assembly file. Work axes are used to define an axis when the existing geometry does not represent the required axis. Work axes are parametrically attached to the model geometry and/or default work features. When you create a work axis using features of existing geometry, if the geometry changes, the work axis updates to reflect those changes. Procedure
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Work Axis tool. Panel Bar
Keyboard Shortcut
/
Repeating the Work Axis Tool If you need to create multiple work axes, you can activate the Repeat Command option. While the Work Axis tool is active, right-click in the graphics window and click Repeat Command on the shortcut menu. The Work Axis tool is repeated until you cancel the command.
Process Overview - Creating Work Axes When you create a work axis, the type of work axis is based completely on the geometry you select. For example, there is no dialog box to create an axis at the intersection of two planes. All work axes are created by selecting existing geometric features or other work features. The following steps represent some examples for creating a work axis.
194
Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features
•
Work Axis at Center of Circular Feature:
•
Work Axis at Intersection of Two Planes:
•
On the Panel Bar, click the Work Axis tool and select a Plane or Planar Surface.
•
Select another Plane or Planar Surface.
•
The work axis is created at the intersection of the two planes.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
195
Redefining Work Axis As you create work axes, they appear in the browser just like other parametric features, however they are not edited in the same way as other parametric features. If you rightclick on the work axis in the browser or graphics window, the Redefine Feature option is available. Select this option to recreate the work axis using any valid method. Any geometry that was based on the work axis being redefined updates to reflect the changes in the work axis.
196
Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features
Example of Work Axes Concept
Process Overview - Creating Work Axes Several methods are available for creating work axes. When you create work axes, you select geometry and/or other work features. Following are some of the most common methods used to create work axes. •
Work Axis at Center of Circular Feature: Selection 1 - Circular Feature
•
Result
Work Axis at Intersection of Two Planes:
Selection 1 - Plane or Planar Surface
Selection 2 - Plane or Planar Surface
Result
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
197
•
Work Axis Through Point/Normal to Plane:
Selection 1 - Plane or Planar Surface
•
Result
Work Axis Through Two Points:
Selection 1 - Point or Midpoint
198
Selection 2 - Point
Selection 2 - Point or Midpoint
Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features
Result
Work Axis Appearance Procedure
Work Axis Appearance You can turn on or off the appearance of work axes individually or globally in the part or assembly file.
Controlling Global Visibility You can toggle the visibility of work features and sketches by using the options on this menu. Select the appropriate option or use the keyboard shortcuts.
View Menu > Object Visibility
Individual Work Axis Visibility To control individual work axis visibility, in the browser, right-click the work axis and click Visibility on the shortcut menu.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
199
Exercise: Work Axes In this exercise, you use work axes to add features to an existing part. You will utilize both origin work axes as well as new work axes to create the additional features required for the part. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features, click Exercise: Work Axes
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Simple Part Created Using Work Axes
200
Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features
Work Points Overview Overview
Overview Work points are used to represent a single point on the geometry or in space. Each part and assembly file contains one center point work point representing the 0,0,0 coordinate. You can create other work points that are parametrically attached to the geometry or grounded to a location specified. In this lesson you learn how to create and use both grounded and parametric work points.
PC Speaker Base Component
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to •
Utilize the Center Point work point when creating geometry
•
Create parametric work points
•
Create grounded work points
•
Identify methods used to create work points
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
201
Center Point Work Point Each part and assembly file contains a Center Point work point. Located under the Origin folder in the Part/Assembly browser, this point represents the 0,0,0 coordinate. Work planes and work axes extend outward from this point. Concept
In this lesson you learn how to access and use the Center Point work point in your designs.
Isometric View of Origin Axes and Center Point
Identifying the Center Point Work Point Expand the Origin folder to expose the origin work features. The Center Point work point appears at the bottom of the list. By default, visibility for the center point is turned off. Right-click on the center point and click Visibility on the shortcut menu to display the center point.
Center Point Work Point
202
Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features
Initial Use for Center Point Work Point It is recommended that all designs initially reference the Center Point work point by constraints or dimensions. The following steps describe how to reference the Center Point work point in your design. 1. 2.
Create a new part file. The default sketch is automatically created. On the Panel Bar, click the Project Geometry tool and in the browser, expand the Origin folder and select the Center Point.
Now that the center point is projected onto the sketch, you can create your initial sketch geometry relative to its position.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
203
3.
Next add constraints and/or dimension referencing the center point work point. This insures that when the dimensions change, the sketch geometry stays in the same position relative the origin center point. This technique also positions your geometry relative to the other origin work planes and axes for later use.
After changing the dimensions on the sketch, the geometry is still centered around the projected center point.
Center Point Visibility Note
204
You do not need to turn on the visibility of the center point to reference it in your design features. To project the center point, in the browser, expand the Origin folder and select it.
Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features
The Work Point Tool You use the Work Point tool to create parametric construction points on part features. Several methods are available for creating these work points. Either method creates a work point that is parametrically attached to the geometry or other work features. If this geometry changes, the work point changes accordingly. Procedure
Work points are used as construction geometry to assist in the creation of other geometry and features.
Potential Uses for Work Points Following are some potential uses for work points: •
Basis for assembly constraints
•
Projection onto sketches
•
Basis for new work features
•
Creation of 3D sketches by drawing lines between work points
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Work Point tool. Panel Bar
Keyboard Shortcut
.
Repeating the Work Point Tool If you need to create multiple work points, you can activate the Repeat Command option. While the Work Point tool is active, right-click in the graphics window and click Repeat Command on the shortcut menu. The Work Point tool will be repeated until you cancel the command.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
205
Process Overview - Creating Work Points Several methods are available for creating work points. The work point position is determined by the geometry or other work features that are selected. The following steps represent some examples for creating a work points. •
Creating a work point on a vertex
On the Panel Bar, click the Work Point tool and select a vertex on the part
•
Creating a work point the midpoint of an edge
On the Panel Bar, click the Work Point tool and select the of an edge
206
The work point is created on the selected vertex
The work point is created on the midpoint of the selected edge
Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features
•
Creating a work point at the intersection of a edge and plane
On the Panel Bar, click the Work Point tool and select an edge or axis
Select a plane or surface
The work point is created at the intersection of the edge and plane
Redefining Work Points As you create work points, they appear in the browser just like other parametric features, however they are not edited in the same way as other parametric features. If you right-click on the work point in the browser or graphics window, the Redefine Feature option is available. Selecting this option enables you to recreate the work point using any valid method. Any geometry that was based on the work point being redefined updates to reflect the changes in the work point.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
207
Grounded Work Points Unlike standard work points which must be placed somewhere on the geometry or at an intersection of geometry and/work features, grounded work points can be placed anywhere in 3D space. When you execute the Grounded Work Point tool, you must select existing geometry for the initial placement, however after the initial placement is selected, the work point can be moved and/or rotated in any direction. Procedure
After the grounded work points position has been set, it appears in the graphics window the same as a standard work point, and can be used in the same way as a standard work point. Grounded work points differ from standard work points in that they are not parametrically attached to the model geometry. Unlike standard work points which update their position to reflect changes in model geometry, grounded work points remain in their set position until manually moved.
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Grounded Work Point tool. Panel Bar
Keyboard Shortcut
;
3D Move/Rotate Dialog Box After you select the initial location for the grounded work point, you are presented with the 3D Move/Rotate dialog box. The interface in the dialog box changes depending on which type of transformation you are doing on the grounded work point.
3D Move/Rotate Dialog Box
208
Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features
The image above describes the transformation options when moving a grounded work point. When you select a Triad element for a move transformation, the fields available in the dialog box are based on the triad element selected. When you select an axis element on the Triad, the dialog box changes to enable you to input or drag an angle value.
Grounded Work Points - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating grounded work points. 1.
On the Panel Bar, click the Grounded Work Point tool and select a vertex or other work point to define the initial position.
2.
The work point triad appears at the selected location. To transform the grounded work point, you must select an element of the triad according to the
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
209
transformation desired.
3.
Select the More tab to see additional options. Select the Redefine Alignment or Position option to realign the triad. In this image, the triad Y Axis is selected, and then the angled edge on the part is selected.
The previous steps results in the triad being aligned to the selected edge.
210
Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features
4.
In this image, the triad Y axis arrow element is selected enabling you to move the work point along the Y axis by entering a value or clicking and dragging the distance in the graphics window.
5.
Click Apply or OK to create the work point at the current location.
The work point is displayed in the graphics window just like a standard work point. However, note the slightly different icon for grounded work points in the browser.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
211
Moving and Rotating Grounded Work Points - Process Overview After you create the grounded work point, you have options to redefine or move/rotate the work point. Redefining a work point is the same as redefining other work features. The following steps represent an overview for using the 3D Move/Rotate dialog box to transform an existing grounded work point.
212
1.
In the browser, right-click on the grounded work point and click 3D Move/Rotate on the shortcut menu.
2.
To move the triad only, enabling you to transform the work point from a point other than its current position, in the 3D Move/Rotate dialog box select the More tab and then select the Move Triad Only option. Select the Redefine alignment or position option and select an element of the triad. In the image below, the triad is being relocated to the center of the part, where a standard work point exists. This would enable you to move or rotate the grounded work point from the new location.
Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features
3.
Clear the Move Triad Only option and click the Transform tab. Select an axis element on the triad and enter or drag and angle of rotation. Click Apply or OK to position the grounded work point at the current location.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
213
Additional Examples of Work Points Following are some additional methods for creating work points. Concept
•
Work point at the intersection of a line or axis and a surface:
Selection 1 - Line or Axis
•
Result
Work point at the intersection of a plane and a curve:
Selection 1 - Plane or Face
214
Selection 2 - Surface
Selection 2 - Curve
Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features
Result
Exercise: Work Points In this exercise, you create a PC speaker base component by using sketched features and work points. To save time, the sketch geometry has already been created. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features, click Exercise: Work Points
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
PC Speaker Base Component
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
215
Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Work Features Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Work Features Print Exercise Reference
In this exercise you create the Offset-Rod-Guide part by using the concepts and procedures you learned in this chapter. You create different types of work features, sketched features, and hole features.
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features, click Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Work Features
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Offset-Rod-Guide
216
Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features
Chapter Summary Summary
You learned the following in this chapter: Summary
•
How to locate and utilize the default work planes contained in every part and assembly file.
•
How to create new work planes using different methods to define them.
•
How to control the appearance of work planes in your part and assembly files.
•
How to use the default work axes as well as create new work axes. Y
•
How to redefine and control the appearance of work axes in your model.
•
How to use the default center point work point.
•
How to create new work points, both parametric and grounded.
•
How to redefine and control the appearance of work points in your model.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
217
218
Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features
Introduction to Placed Features Chapter Introduction
In this chapter
In this chapter you learn about...
After completing this chapter, you will be able to...
•
Creating and editing Fillet features.
•
Different types of fillets that can be created.
•
Creating and editing chamfer features.
•
The three different methods for defining chamfer features.
•
Using the Hole and Thread tools.
•
•
Create and edit fillet features.
•
Use the options on each tab of the Fillet dialog box to control how a fillet is created.
Representing external and/or internal threads on a part.
•
Create and edit chamfer features.
•
Creating Shell features to remove material from your part model.
•
•
Creating rectangular and circular patterns of features on your part.
Use the three available methods for creating chamfer features.
•
Create and edit hole and thread features.
•
Create and edit thread features on your part by using the Thread tool.
•
Create and edit shell features to remove material from a part.
•
Use the options contained in the Shell dialog box.
•
Create and edit rectangular and circular patterns.
•
Apply face drafts to a part model by using the Face Draft tool.
•
Create and use custom color styles on a part model.
•
Adding Face Drafts to a model.
•
Setting the draft angle and pull direction.
•
Applying custom color styles to a part model.
Fillet Features Overview Overview
Overview Fillet features are among the most widely used features on any three-dimensional (3D) part. Fillets are commonly used when parts are designed to remove sharp edges and reduce the potential of stress cracking, and also for aesthetic purposes. They can exist on geometry in various sizes and shapes. The most common type of fillet feature is a constant radius fillet, however certain situations may call for the use of variable radius fillets. In this lesson you learn how to create both constant and variable radius fillets.
Pillar Block with Fillets
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to •
220
Use the Fillet tool to create constant and variable radius fillets
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
The Fillet Tool You use the Fillet tool to create fillets and rounds on existing 3D geometry. You can create both constant radius and variable radius fillets with the Fillet tool. Procedure
Before and After Fillet Features
Access Methods You can use the following methods to access the Fillet tool. Panel Bar
Keyboard Shortcut
SHIFT+F
Constant Radius Tab
Fillet Dialog Box - Constant Tab
Edge Sets: An edge set consists of selected edges and a radius value. Edges: Displays the number of edges selected for this edge set. The arrow icon indicates you are in the selection mode and can continue to select the required edges.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
221
Radius: Specify a value for the radius of the fillet for each edge set. Although each edge set can have a different radius value, they are all treated as one fillet feature. The pencil icon indicates that the radius value is being edited. You cannot select additional edges until you select the edges field of the edge set. To remove selected edges from the edge set, select the appropriate edge set in the dialog box, then while holding the CTRL or SHIFT key, select the edges to be removed. Click to add: Select this area of the dialog box to create a new edge set. Each edge set consist of selected edges and a specific radius. Select mode area: Determines how edges are selected.
222
•
Edge: Enables you to select or remove individual edges for the fillet.
•
Loop: Enables you to select or remove the edges of a closed loop on a face.
•
Feature: Enables you to select or remove all edges of a feature at once.
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
All Fillets: Select this option to automatically select all concave edges and corners. If some edges have already been selected, a new edge set is created for the remaining edges. The manually selected edges are not included in the new edge set. You cannot remove individual edges from the All Fillets edge set.
All Rounds: Select this option to automatically select all convex edges and corners. If some edges are already selected, a new edge set is created for the remaining edges. The manually selected edges are not included in the new edge set. You cannot remove individual edges from the All Rounds edge set.
Variable Radius Tab
Fillet Dialog Box - Variable Tab
Edges: Select the edge to place a variable radius fillet. Only one edge is allowed per selection. Use the Click to Add area for additional edges.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
223
Point: List the start point and endpoint of the selected edge. Select additional points along the edge for more control over the variable radius.
Radius: Enter a radius value for the selected point. The point selected in the dialog box is highlighted on the edge.
Position: Specify a position along the selected edge for the selected point. Values represent the percentage from the start point. For example, .25 represents a distance 25% of the length of the edge from the start point. Smooth radius transition: Select this option to gradually blend the radius between points. Clear this option to create fillets with a linear transition between the points. On
224
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
Off
Setbacks Tab
Fillet Dialog Box - Setbacks Tab
Vertex: Select the vertex of three selected edges. Edge/Setback: Select each edge and specify a setback value for the edge. The value specified represents a distance along the selected edge from the vertex.
When you create fillets on three edges that meet at a vertex, using the Setbacks tab is optional. The following images represent the result of using the Setbacks tab. Not Using Setbacks
Using Setbacks
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
225
Fillet Dialog Box - Options To access the following options, click the [>>] button to expand the Fillet dialog box.
Fillet Dialog Box - Expanded
Roll along sharp edges: This option sets the solution method for the fillet when conditions would cause adjacent edges to be extended in order to maintain the radius. If this option is selected, the fillet radius varies when necessary to preserve the adjacent faces. If this option is not selected, the fillet radius remains constant and adjacent edges are extended as required to maintain the radius.
Rolling ball where possible: This option sets the corner style for the fillets.
226
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
Automatic Edge Chain: When this option is selected, all edges tangent to the selected edge are selected automatically. Preserve All Features: When this option is selected, features that intersect the fillet feature are checked and their intersections are calculated. If this option is not selected, features that intersect with the fillet are not calculated. Only the selected edge is calculated during the fillet operation. In the following images, the cut feature would intersect the fillet feature. An error results when creating the fillet feature. Editing the fillet feature and enabling the Preserve All Features option fixes the problem and the fillet and cut features remain valid. Feature Intersecting Fillet
Creating Constant Radius Fillets - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating constant radius fillet features. 1.
On the Panel Bar, click the Fillet tool.
2.
With the Fillet dialog box displayed, in the graphics window, select the edges to be filleted and specify a radius for each edge set. Create an edge set for each different radius. In the image below, two edge sets have been created. The first edge set contains two edges to receive a 2 mm fillet and the second set contains three edges to receive a 1 mm fillet.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
227
3.
Click OK to create the fillet feature. Note in the browser only one fillet feature appears even though five edges were filleted in this example.
Creating Variable Radius Fillets - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating variable radius fillet features. 1. 2.
228
On the Panel Bar, click the Fillet tool. With the Fillet dialog box displayed, select the Variable tab, and in the graphics window, select the edge(s) to apply the variable radius fillet. In the Fillet dialog box, click the Start point to modify and in the Radius field enter the radius for the Start point then click the End point to modify the radius End point.
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
3.
To add an additional point along the selected edge, drag the cursor along the selected edge and left click to add the point.
4.
After the additional point(s) is added, in the Radius box specify a radius for the fillet at the selected point and in the Position box specify a position along the edge for the new point.
5.
Click OK to create the fillet.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
229
Editing Fillet Features After you have created a Fillet feature, you can edit it using the same dialog box. In the browser, right-click the Fillet feature and click Edit Feature on the shortcut menu. The Fillet dialog box is displayed enabling you to change the fillet parameters, add or remove selections, and change options.
230
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
Exercise: Fillet Features In this exercise, you create fillet features on the existing Pillar-Block-Rev-2 component. You will create both constant and variable radius fillets. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features, click Exercise: Fillet Features
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Pillar Block with Fillets
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
231
Chamfer Features Overview Overview
Overview You can place chamfer features on parts to serve different purposes from functional to aesthetic. Chamfers can exist on parts in various sizes and angles. In this lesson you learn how to create and edit chamfer features.
Rod-Bearing-Mount Complete with Chamfers
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to •
232
Use the Chamfer tool to create and edit chamfers
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
The Chamfer Tool You use the Chamfer tool to add chamfer features to edges on your part. These features, like other features, are fully parametric and easily editable after you create them. When you create chamfer features, you can choose from three different methods which determine how the chamfer is specified. With any of the methods, the end result is the replacement of the selected edge(s) with a face(s) at an angle specified either directly or indirectly through the use of distances. Procedure
Before and After Chamfer Features
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Chamfer tool. Panel Bar
Keyboard Shortcut
SHIFT+K
When you use any of the above listed methods to access the Chamfer tool, the following options are available. There are three methods for creating chamfers, Single Distance, Distance/Angle, and Distance/Distance. Each method presents different options in the Chamfer dialog box.
Chamfer Dialog Box - Single Distance Option
Edges: Select the edges to be chamfered
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
233
Distance: Specify a distance for the chamfer. The distance is applied to both sides of the selected edge resulting in a 45-degree chamfer.
Chamfer Dialog Box - Distance/Angle Option
Edges: Select the edge(s) to be chamfered. This option is disabled until you select a face. The edge(s) selected must be adjacent to the selected face. Face: Select a face adjacent to the edge you are chamfering. The angle is measured from this face. Distance: Specify a distance for the chamfer. The distance is measured from the selected edge along the selected face. Angle: Enter an angle for the chamfer. The angle is measured from the selected face.
Chamfer Dialog Box - Distance/Distance Option
Edge: Select the edge to be chamfered. When you use this method, only one edge can be chamfered at a time. Click this button to flip the sides of the selected edge for calculating Distance1 and Distance2. Distance1: Specify the first distance of the chamfer. This distance is measured along one of the adjacent faces. Distance2: Specify the second distance of the chamfer. This distance is measured along the opposite adjacent face.
234
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
You can expand the Chamfer dialog box by clicking the [>>] button. Expanding the Chamfer dialog box presents the following options.
Chamfer Dialog Box - Expanded Area
Edge Chain: The options control how the edges are selected. The edge selected and all tangentially connected edges. Only the edge selected. Setback: This option is available only when using the single distance method. When chamfering three edges that meet at a corner, this option determines the result of the corner.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
235
Creating and Editing Chamfer Features - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating and editing chamfer features.
236
1. 2.
On the Panel Bar, click the Chamfer tool. In the Chamfer dialog box, select the desired method to create the chamfer. • For a single distance chamfer, select the edge(s) to be chamfered, enter a distance for the chamfer and click OK.
•
The resulting chamfer is created
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
•
For the Distance/Angle method, select the Distance/Angle option. Select the face, and then select the edge(s) to be chamfered. Enter a distance and angle for the chamfer and click OK.
•
The resulting chamfer is created
•
For the Distance/Distance method, select the Distance/Distance option. Select the edge to be chamfered. Enter distance values in the Distance1 and Distance2 fields.
Optionally flip the direction of the chamfer by clicking the Flip Direction icon.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
237
Click OK to create the chamfer.
The resulting chamfer is created.
Editing Chamfer Features After the chamfer feature is created, it will appear in the browser. Right-click the feature and click Edit Feature on the shortcut menu. The Chamfer dialog box is displayed enabling you to edit the feature the same way it was created.
238
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
Exercise: Chamfer Features In this exercise, you will add chamfer features to an existing part. After the features have been created, you will edit the chamfer features and view the result. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features, click Exercise: Chamfer Features
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Rod-Bearing-Mount Complete with Chamfers
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
239
Hole and Thread Features Overview Overview
Overview Hole features enable you to create parametric holes on your part. Although Hole features are considered to be placed features, they do require an unconsumed sketch representing the center point locations for the holes. You use the Thread tool to place both internal and external thread features on the part. In this lesson you learn how to use the Hole tool to create parametric hole features and how to use the Thread tool to create parametric thread features on existing geometry.
Hydraulic Valve Component
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to
240
•
Use the Hole tool to create and edit hole features
•
Use the Hole tool to create internal thread features and use the Thread tool to create external thread features
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
The Hole Tool You use the Hole tool to create parametric hole features on parts. Although you can create holes by extruding a circle with a Cut feature relationship, the Hole tool provides greater flexibility in the variations and types of holes, such as counterbore, countersink, and threads. With the Hole tool you can create the various hole types in a single dialog box, rather than having to manually edit or create geometry to achieve the same result. Procedure
When you create holes using the Hole tool, you must create a sketch containing the hole center points. You can create center points using the Point/Hole Center sketch tool, the endpoints of sketched lines, or points projected from other geometry in the part. When you start the Hole tool, you are presented with different options for the type of hole being created. You can create standard drilled holes, counterbored holes, and countersunk holes. Additional options for the drill point and thread options are also available.
Part with Various Types of Holes
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Hole tool. Panel Bar
Shortcut Menu
Keyboard Shortcut
H
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
241
Holes Dialog Box - Expanded
The Holes dialog box includes the following options and specifications: Centers: Select the center points to use for the hole(s). If you create the sketch using the Point/Hole Center objects, the center points will be selected automatically. Other acceptable points include endpoints of lines, projected centerpoints of circles and arcs, and projected work points. You can also clear hole centers from the selection set by holding the CTRL key and selecting the center points. Type: Click the button representing the desired hole type: drilled, counterbore, and countersink. Termination: Select one of the following Termination types: •
Distance: This option enables you to specify a depth for the hole in the preview area of the dialog box.
•
Through All: This option enables the hole to go all the way through the part.
•
To: This option enables you to specify a face or plane to terminate the hole. Click this button to flip the direction of the hole.
Drill Point: Select either a flat bottom drill or standard tapered drill point. •
Optionally specify an angle other than the standard 118-degree drill point.
Tapped: This option enables tapped threads in the hole and expands the Hole dialog box. Thread Type: From the drop-down list, select the thread type.
242
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
Full Depth: This option creates the threads at the full depth of the hole. If this option is not selected, you must specify a thread depth in the preview area of the dialog box. Nominal Size: From the drop-down list, select the nominal hole size. Pitch: From the drop-down list, select the thread pitch. Available pitches are based on the selected Nominal Size. Class: From the drop-down list, select the Class of thread. Diameter: Select the actual diameter used to create the hole. •
Minor: Creates the hole using the Minor Diameter of the selected thread size.
•
Pitch: Creates the hole using the Pitch diameter of the selected thread size.
•
Major: Creates the hole using the Major Diameter of the selected thread size.
•
Tap Drill: Creates the hole using the Tap Drill diameter of the selected thread size.
Right Hand: Select this option for a right-hand thread. Left Hand: Select this option for a left-hand thread.
Creating and Editing Holes - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating and editing holes. 1.
Create a new sketch containing the center point location for the hole features.
2.
On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit the sketch.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
243
3.
On the Panel Bar, click the Hole tool. If you use the Point/Hole Center sketch object, the hole centers will be automatically selected. Adjust the options in the dialog box depending on the type of hole(s) you need to create. Click OK to create the hole(s).
In some situations it may be easier to draw construction line segments to locate the center points of the holes. Remember, the endpoints of lines can be used to locate hole features.
4.
244
On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit the sketch.
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
5.
On the Panel Bar, click the Hole tool and then select the endpoints of the line segments. In the image below the endpoints are being selected and the Tapped option is being used. Select the Thread type from the drop-down list and adjust the other thread options as required. Click OK to create the threaded hole.
Note the bitmap representing a threaded hole. The bitmap will change according to the thread specification. Fine threads will appear fine while coarse threads appear coarse. Left-hand versus right-hand threads are also depicted correctly.
Preventing Interference Between Holes and Fasteners Tip
In the Threads area, set the Diameter option to Major. This creates the hole at the major diameter of the thread, thus preventing an interference being returned between the fastener and the hole.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
245
Thread Features The Thread tool enables you to create thread features on external and internal surfaces. Many of the same options available for internal threads using the Hole tool are also available when you use the Thread tool. Threads are considered a placed feature, therefore, the Thread tool does not require an unconsumed sketch. All that is required is existing cylindrical surfaces to apply the thread feature. Procedure
Example of External Thread Features
Access Methods Use the following method to access the Thread tool. Panel Bar
Thread Feature Dialog Box - Location Tab
The Location tab in the Thread Feature dialog box includes the following options and specifications: Face: Click the icon to select the face(s) to apply thread features.
246
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
Display in Model: Select this option to display the thread bitmaps on the model. If this option is not selected, the thread feature is created but is not displayed on the geometry. Full Length: Select this option to apply the thread feature to the entire length of the selected face. When this option is not selected, the following options become available. Click this button to flip the direction of the thread feature. • Length: Specifies the length of the thread feature on the selected face. •
Offset: Specifies the distance from the start face of the thread feature.
Thread Feature Dialog Box - Specification Tab
The Specification tab in the Thread Feature dialog box includes the following options and specifications: Thread Type: Select the required thread type. Nominal Size: The nominal thread size is automatically selected based upon the diameter of the selected face. Selecting a nominal size other than the size automatically selected may result in an error when you click OK. Pitch: Select the appropriate thread pitch from the drop-down list. Class: Select the appropriate thread class from the drop-down list. Right Hand: Select this option to generate a right hand thread. Left Hand: Select this option to generate a left hand thread.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
247
Creating Thread Features - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating external thread features using the Thread tool. 1.
On the Panel Bar, click the Thread tool and select a cylindrical face on the part. On the Location tab, adjust the Thread Length options as required.
2.
On the Specification tab, select the appropriate thread type and adjust the other settings as required by your design intent. Click OK to create the thread feature.
The thread feature appears on the model geometry as well as in the browser. Just like other parametric features, you can right-click the thread feature and click Edit Feature on the shortcut menu to edit the feature using the same dialog box used in creating the feature.
248
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
Exercise: Hole and Thread Features In this exercise, you open the Hyd-Valve-Housing part file and create new hole features. You will use the Hole tool to add the necessary hole features. You then use the Thread tool to add thread features to the component. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features, click Exercise: Hole and Thread Features
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Hydraulic Valve Component
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
249
Shell Features Overview Overview
Overview You use shell features to remove material from existing solid features. By using shell features, you can create the overall shape of your part and then create a cavity in the part by specifying a wall thickness for the faces. In this lesson you learn how to create and edit shell features.
Complete Part Containing Shell Features
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
250
Use the Shell tool to create shelled features
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
The Shell Tool You use the Shell tool to create shelled features on existing solid geometry. With the Shell tool, you can remove material from an existing part and create a cavity in the part by specifying a wall thickness for the faces. One key advantage to using the Shell tool is that you can create differing wall thickness for each face of the part. Generally, you select at least one face on the part to be removed from the shell feature leaving the remaining faces as the shell walls. Procedure
Before and After Shell Feature
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Shell tool. Panel Bar
Shell Dialog Box
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
251
Remove Faces: Click this icon to select the face(s) to remove from the shell feature. The remaining faces serve as walls for the shell feature. If you do not remove any faces from the shell feature, it will result in a cavity in the part with no open faces. Thickness: Specify value for the wall thickness. Direction: Click one of the direction buttons. • Inside: The thickness is applied to the inside of the existing faces. • Outside: The thickness is applied to the outside of the existing faces. • Both: Half of the thickness is applied to each side of the face.
Unique face thickness: Select the Click to Add area of the dialog box to create unique face thicknesses for the shell feature. Select the face(s) and specify a unique wall thickness for the face. This value overrides the default thickness for the selected face(s) only.
Creating Shell Features - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating shell features.
252
1.
Create a part representing the overall shape required.
2.
On the Panel bar, click the Shell tool and select the faces to remove from the shell operation. In the Thickness box enter a wall thickness.
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
3.
To assign unique wall thicknesses, click the [>>] button to expand the dialog box and select the Click to Add area and select the face(s) to assign a unique wall thickness. Under Unique Face Thickness, specify a thickness for the selected face(s). Click OK to create the shell feature.
The shell feature is created.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
253
Exercise: Shell Features In this exercise, you will create a shell feature for the part, applying a common wall thickness to all faces. You will then edit the shell feature to include unique wall thicknesses on different features. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features, click Exercise: Shell Features
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Complete Part Containing Shell Features
254
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
Pattern Features Overview Overview
Overview Pattern features are used to parametrically duplicate selected features. There are two types of patterns: Rectangular and Circular. Each type offers different options for creating the pattern. When you pattern a feature, you are creating parametric copies of that feature. If the original feature changes, the patterned features update to reflect those changes. In this lesson you learn how to create and edit Rectangular and Circular Pattern features.
Completed Face Plate with Patterned Features
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to •
Create and edit rectangular patterns
•
Create and edit circular patterns
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
255
The Rectangular Pattern Tool You use the Rectangular Pattern tool to duplicate one or more features in a rectangular pattern. There are several options to control how the feature(s) will be patterned. You can pattern a feature along one or two directions and/or paths, with options to control feature spacing. Procedure
When you create these patterns, they are associative to the original feature, so any changes in the original feature are reflected in the pattern occurrences.
Example of Rectangular Patterns
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Rectangular Pattern tool. Panel Bar
Keyboard Shortcut
256
SHIFT+R
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
Rectangular Pattern Dialog Box - Expanded
The Rectangular Pattern dialog box includes the following options and specifications: Features: Select the feature(s) to be patterned. Direction 1: Path: Select the path for Direction 1. This can be the edge of a part or a 2D sketch representing the path for the pattern. Use the Flip Direction button to flip the path direction. Enter the number of occurrences for the pattern. This number includes the original feature. Enter a value for the pattern distance. This value represents either total distance of the pattern or spacing between each feature. Select one of the following options from the drop-down list: Spacing: Distance value represents the spacing between each occurrence. Distance: Distance value represents the total pattern distance. Curve Length: Disables the Distance field and divides the curve length by the number of occurrences. Direction 2: This column is optional and contains the same options as Direction 1. Start: Sets the start point for the first occurrence. Pattern can start at any selected point.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
257
Termination Method: Identical: This is the default method which provides the best performance for large patterns. Using this method, each occurrence uses an identical termination method regardless of where they intersect other features. Adjust to Model: This method enables each occurrence termination to be calculated. This method requires more processing and can increase computational time on large patterns. Orientation Method: These options control the orientation of the patterned features. Identical: Occurrence orientation is identical to the first feature. Adjust to Direction 1 or Direction 2: Occurrences will be rotated as the path changes directions.
Browser Appearance of Rectangular/Circular Patterns When you create patterns, the way they appear in the browser is unique compared to other features. If you expand a rectangular or circular pattern, you immediately see the difference. Located under the pattern feature, you will find any sketches used as a path, along with a folder containing the features used in the pattern. Finally you will see an Occurrence item for each occurrence in the pattern. The first Occurrence represents the initial feature used in the pattern followed by the number of occurrences created.
Right-click on an occurrence and click Suppress on the shortcut menu to suppress the selected occurrence. This option is not available on the first occurrence.
258
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
Creating Rectangular Patterns - Process Overview The following steps can be used to create a rectangular pattern. 1.
Create a part with a feature(s) to be patterned.
2.
On the Panel Bar, click the Rectangular Pattern tool and select the feature to be patterned. Click the Path button under Direction 1 and select a path, part edge, or origin axis for the pattern. Enter the number of occurrences and distance values and adjust the Spacing method accordingly. Optionally include information for Direction 2 and click OK.
3.
To create a pattern along a path, create a 2D sketch containing the path for the pattern.
4.
On the Panel Bar, click the Rectangular Pattern tool and select the feature(s) to be patterned. Click the Path button under Direction 1 and select the path for the pattern. Adjust the number of occurrence, distance, and spacing options as required and click OK. Optionally provide information for Direction 2.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
259
The Circular Pattern Tool You use the Circular Pattern tool to duplicate one or more features in a circular pattern. When you create these patterns, they are associative to the original feature, so any changes in the original feature are reflected in the pattern occurrences. Procedure
When you start the Circular Pattern tool, you must first select a feature to pattern. You then select a rotation axis which serves as the center of the pattern. Next you set the pattern properties such as number of occurrences and angle. There are also options for controlling the creation method and positioning method.
Example of a Circular Pattern
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Circular Pattern tool. Panel Bar
Keyboard Shortcut
260
SHIFT+O
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
Circular Pattern Dialog Box - Expanded
The Circular Pattern dialog box includes the following options and specifications: Features: Select the feature(s) to be patterned. Rotation Axis: Select the rotation axis for the pattern. Valid selections include circular faces, work axes, or part edges. Placement: : Specify the number of occurrences for the pattern. This number includes the original feature. : Specify the angle for the pattern. The result of this angle is based on the Positioning Method chosen. : Flips the rotational direction of the pattern.
Creation Method: Identical: This the default method which provides the best performance for large patterns. Using this method, each occurrence uses an identical termination method regardless of where they intersect other features. Adjust to Model: This method enables each occurrence termination to be calculated. This method requires more processing and can increase computational time on large patterns. Positioning Method: Incremental: Sets the angle value to represent the angle between occurrences. Fitted: Sets the angle value to represent the total rotational angle of the pattern.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
261
Browser Appearance of Rectangular/Circular Patterns When you create patterns, the way they appear in the browser is unique compared to other features. If you expand a rectangular or circular pattern, you immediately see the difference. Located under the pattern feature, you will find any sketches used as a path, along with a folder containing the features used in the pattern. Finally you will see an Occurrence item for each occurrence in the pattern. The first Occurrence represents the initial feature used in the pattern followed by the number of occurrences created.
Right-click on an occurrence and click Suppress on the shortcut menu to suppress the selected occurrence. This option is not available on the first occurrence.
262
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
Creating Circular Patterns - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating circular patterns. 1.
Create a part containing the feature(s) to be patterned.
2.
On the Panel Bar, click the Circular Pattern tool and select the feature(s) to be patterned. Then click the Rotation Axis icon and select the feature representing the rotation axis for the pattern.
3.
Optionally click the [>>] button to expand the dialog box and adjust the options as required. Click OK to create the pattern.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
263
Exercise: Pattern Features In this exercise, you open a face plate component and create both rectangular and patterned features. You then edit the patterned features to suppress occurrences within each. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features, click Exercise: Pattern Features
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Completed Face Plate with Patterned Features
264
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
Face Drafts Overview Overview
Overview When you create designs for casting or molds, you need to apply draft angles to the faces to allow for the part to be pulled from the mold. This draft angle is referred to as a face draft. Depending on the design and manufacturing intent, you might apply the draft angle to all faces, or to single selected faces. In this lesson you learn how to apply draft angles to faces using the Face Draft tool.
Indexer Component with Face Drafts
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to •
Use the Face Draft tool to create and edit face drafts
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
265
The Face Draft Tool You use the Face Draft tool to apply draft angles to selected faces on the part. A draft angle applied to faces on the part allows the part to be pulled away from the mold. When you create a face draft feature, you must specify the Pull Direction, which can be based on a face, edge, or origin plane or axis. After you define the Pull Direction, you select the faces to apply the draft angle. The result of the draft angle depends on the orientation of the face in relation to the Pull Direction. Procedure
When you create the face draft feature, you can also choose between a Fixed Edge face draft or Fixed Plane face draft. In this lesson you learn how to create face drafts using each of these methods.
Before and After Face Draft Feature
Face Draft Angles In reality, draft angles are generally very small. For visual clarity, the draft angles in this lesson may be exaggerated. Note
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Face Draft tool. Panel Bar
Keyboard Shortcut
266
SHIFT+D
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
The Face Draft dialog box includes the following options and specifications: Fixed Edge Method: This method creates a face draft on the selected face(s) and the selected edge remains fixed in place.
Fixed Plane Method: This method creates a face draft calculated from the location of the selected plane. The Pull Direction is normal to the selected plane. Depending on the position of the selected plane this method causes material to be added on one side of the plane and subtracted from the opposite side of the plane.
Pull Direction: Select a face, plane, edge, or axis to define the direction the part is pulled away from the mold. After you make the selection, you can use the Flip Direction button to flip the Pull Direction. Faces: Select the faces to apply the face draft feature. If using the Fixed Edge method, be certain to select the edge you want to remain fixed. Note: If you select an incorrect edge, use the CTRL or SHIFT key and reselect the edge to remove it from the selection set. Draft Angle: Specify an angle value for the face draft.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
267
Creating Face Drafts - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating face drafts. 1.
Create a new part containing the features requiring face drafts.
2.
On the Panel Bar, click the Face Draft tool. In the Face Draft dialog box, select the Fixed Edge or Fixed Plane method and then select a face, plane, edge, or axis to define the Pull Direction.
3.
Select the faces to apply the face draft. If you are using the Fixed Edge method, select the face at a point closest to the fixed edge. In the Draft Angle box, enter an angle value. Click OK to create the face draft.
The face drafts are applied to the selected faces.
268
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
Exercise: Face Drafts In this exercise, you create and edit face drafts on the part. You will experiment with both the Fixed Edge method and Fixed Plane method for creating the face draft. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features, click Exercise: Face Drafts
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Indexer Component with Face Drafts
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
269
Creating and Using Color Styles Overview Overview
Overview As you create new parts using Autodesk Inventor, a default color style is assigned. You can assign different colors to parts and even create new custom color styles. In this lesson you learn how to create and assign color styles to parts.
Assigning a New Color Style
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to •
270
Change and assign color styles to parts
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
Creating and Using Color Styles When you create new parts, they are assigned the Default color style. Other color styles are available and can be accessed from the Style drop-down list on the Standard toolbar. Procedure
Color styles are stored within each part or assembly file. If you create a new color style, it is available only in the part or assembly in which it was created. You can copy these custom color styles to templates or other part files by using the Organizer tool, which is located on the Format pull-down menu. Use the following methods to create and apply color styles. Pull-Down Menu
Format > Colors
To Assign Colors - Standard Toolbar
Color Dialog Box
Style Name: Enter a color style name. The list will update to reflect the closest match. When selecting a material from the list, the color style name will appear here. Color Tab: Located on this tab, is four color properties, Diffuse, Emissive, Specular, and Ambient. Select the color swatch next to each properties and select a color from the Custom Color dialog box. Appearance: Use the sliders to adjust the Shiny and Opaque color properties. Save: Click to save the changes to the selected color style.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
271
Delete: Click to delete the selected color style. New: Click to create a new color style. Apply: Click to apply the changes to the color style, and leave the dialog box open. Close: Click to close the dialog box.
Colors Dialog Box - Texture Tab
Choose: Click to display the Texture Chooser dialog box. %Scale: Adjust the slider to scale the texture map. Rotation: Adjust the slider to rotate the texture map. Remove: Click to remove the selected texture from the color style.
Texture Chooser Dialog Box
Select a texture by dragging the slider in the preview window. Texture Library:
272
•
Application Library: Select this option to display textures from the Application library.
•
Project Library: Select this option to display textures stored within the current project.
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
Exercise: Creating and Using Color Styles In this exercise, you will create a new color style and apply it to your part. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features, click Exercise: Creating and Using Color Styles
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Assigning a New Color Style
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
273
Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Placed Features Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Placed Features Print Exercise Reference
In this exercise you will utilize the procedures and concepts learned in this lesson to create a plastic handle. The handle is a two piece design for which you are creating one half of the handle.
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features, click Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Placed Features
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Plastic Handle
274
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
Chapter Summary Summary
You learned the following in this chapter: Summary
•
How to create and edit fillet features on a part file.
•
How to use the options on each tab of the Fillet dialog box to control how a fillet feature is created.
•
Three methods available for creating chamfers and how to use each method.
•
How to create and edit Hole and Thread features on a part model.
•
The different options available in the Holes dialog box and how to use these options to create different types of holes.
•
How to add thread features to a model.
•
How to remove material from your part by using the Shell tool.
•
How to use the options in the Shell dialog box and how they effect the shell feature.
•
How to create and edit rectangular and circular patterns on a part model.
•
The options available for each type of pattern and the effect of these options on the pattern features.
•
How to edit a pattern and suppress feature occurrences in the pattern if required.
•
How to use the Face Draft tool to apply draft angles to selected faces on a part model.
•
Why face drafts are typically used and how these manufacturing methods correlate to options in the dialog box such as Pull-Direction.
•
How to create and use custom color styles on a part model.
•
How to create a custom color style that includes a texture map.
•
How to adjust options in the Colors dialog box to effect the appearance properties of a new color style.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
275
276
Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features
Assembly Modeling Fundamentals Overview Overview
Chapter Introduction In this chapter you learn about... •
The assembly modeling environment and interface used to create assembly models.
•
The Assembly Browser.
•
In this chapter After completing this chapter, you will be able to... •
Apply Bottom Up, Top Down, and Middle Out assembly techniques
Controlling the appearance of parts and features in the browser and using Design Views to save assembly views.
•
Use the browser to control different aspects of the assembly environment
•
The Place Component tool.
•
•
Dragging components into the assembly and replacing components in the assembly.
•
Creating components in the context of the assembly.
Activate components inplace within the assembly, resequence and reorder the assembly and use browser filters
•
•
Assembly based work features
•
Using geometry projected from other parts in the assembly to help create new parts.
Create Design Views to save assembly views with specific display related characteristics
•
Degrees of freedom
•
•
Simulating motion in an assembly
Place components in an assembly using the Place Component tool
•
Placing assembly constraints.
•
•
Adaptivity and how it can be used in the assembly.
Drag components into an assembly
•
Analyzing components of an assembly.
•
•
Locating components in and out of the assembly by using different versions of the Find tool.
Replace existing components in an assembly
•
Create new components in the context of the assembly
•
Place assembly constraints
•
Create basic adaptive features for parts used in an assembly
Introduction to Assembly Modeling Overview Using Assembly modeling you bring individual components into a common environment and use various tools to assemble them. You create new geometry, place existing parts and/or assemblies, and manage the relationships between the parts in the assembly. In this lesson, you will learn the concept of assembly modeling and the tools you use to create an assembly.
Completed Assembly
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to
278
•
Understand the concept of assembly modeling and the procedures you use to create an assembly model
•
Navigate the assembly environment and identify the assembly coordinate system
•
Use the Assembly Panel Bar
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Assembly Modeling Concepts You create an assembly by combining multiple components and/or assemblies into a single environment. Parametric relationships are created between each component that determine component behavior in the assembly. Concept
These relationships can range from simple constraint based relationships that determine a components position in the assembly, to advanced relationships such as adaptivity, which enables a component to change size based upon its relationship to other components in the assembly.
Typical Assembly Model
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
279
Assembly Modeling Methods Before you create assembly models you must understand the three basic methods you use to create them and how to choose the correct assembly modeling approach. •
280
Top Down Assembly Modeling: All assembly components are designed in the context of the assembly. You create a blank assembly, then design each component while still in the assembly environment. As you design each component, you are applying the required assembly constraints, and are making changes to parts based upon their relationships to other components in the assembly. You create and edit all geometry while working in the overall assembly. The image below represents a Top-Down approach to assembly modeling. The initial part is created, then while working in the context of the assembly, additional parts are created.
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
•
Bottom Up Assembly Modeling: Individual components for an assembly are designed outside of the assembly where they will be placed. Each part file is designed separate from the assembly and other parts. After you create the parts they are placed into the assembly and constrained to other parts. If changes to the parts are required, they are made outside of the assembly and will automatically be reflected in the assembly model. The image below represents a typical Bottom-Up approach to assembly modeling. Each part is designed separate from the assembly and other components. After the components are designed, they are placed into the assembly.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
281
•
Middle Out Assembly Modeling: This flexible approach closely represents the actual real-world design process. For example, a typical assembly would generally consist of components that are designed specifically for the assembly, and other standard off-the-shelf components such as nuts, bolts, or other standard hardware. So even if you design all of the non-standard components using a Top-Down approach, as soon as you insert the standard off-the-shelf components, you have essentially switched to Middle Out approach because you have included parts in the assembly that were created outside of the assembly. The image below represents a Middle Out approach to assembly modeling. Some components are being placed in the assembly, while others are being designed in the context of the assembly.
You can use all of the methods above and switch between them at anytime. You can begin the assembly using one method and change to a different one. As you become more proficient with the application, and understand the benefits to each modeling approach, you will be able to choose the best approach for a given task.
282
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Assembly Constraints You use Assembly constraints to create parametric relationships between parts in the assembly. Just as you use 2D constraints to control 2D geometry, you use 3D constraints in an assembly to position parts in relation to other parts. There are four basic assembly constraints, each with unique solutions and options. Mate/Flush Constraint: Used to align part features such as faces, edges, or axis.
Angle Constraint: Used to specify an angle between two parts. Applied to faces, edges, or axes.
Tangent Constraint: Used to define a tangential relationship between two parts. Generally applied to circular faces and planar faces. One of the selected faces must be circular.
Insert Constraint: Used to insert one component into another. This constraint effectively combines a mate axis/axis and a mate face/face constraint. Generally applied to bolts, or pins, or any part that needs to be inserted into a hole on another part. Applied by selecting a circular edge on each part.
Each of these constraint types will be described in greater detail later in this chapter.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
283
Subassemblies You use Subassemblies to organize large assemblies into smaller groups. A subassembly is essentially an assembly placed into another assembly. In the context of the overall assembly, the subassembly behaves as a single part. Components within the subassembly are constrained to each other, while the subassembly is constrained to the overall assembly as a single component. You must edit constraints within the assembly where they were created. To do so you activate the subassembly by double-clicking on the subassembly in the browser.
Assembly Sketching You use Assembly sketching to create assembly based features such as holes, extrusions, and chamfers on parts in the assembly. The features however are not stored within the parts that are affected but are local to the current assembly and only effect the parts in the context of the current assembly. Assembly based sketches serve as the basis for assembly features. You can use these features in situations where assemblies share common parts but with features that are unique to the assembly. For example, you create an assembly which was designed to accommodate several different electric motors. Each motor type requires a different hole pattern and other cutouts for routing the wiring harness. The use of assembly features would enable you to create these motor-specific features at the assembly level, thus leaving the parts that are common to all assemblies, unaffected by the feature.
284
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Assembly Environment The assembly environment in Autodesk Inventor software is virtually the same as the part modeling environment with the exception of tools that are unique to assembly modeling. Principle
Assembly Modeling Environment
Assembly Panel Bar: Contains tools specific to assembly modeling. Assembly Browser: Lists all parts and their constraints. When a part is activated for editing, the browser functions are identical to the part modeling environment. Assembly Coordinate Elements: Identical to the part environment, each assembly also contains an independent coordinate system. Expand the Origin folder to expose the origin planes, axes, and center point. Assembly Components: Each component in the assembly is listed. Expand the components to expose the assembly constraints that have been applied. 3D Indicator: Displays the current view orientation relative to the assembly coordinate system.
Assembly Coordinate System Each assembly file contains an independent coordinate system. Default coordinate system elements are aligned with the 0,0,0 point in the assembly and can be used as you build the assembly. When you place the first part into the assembly, the origin point of the part file will be matched to the origin point of the assembly file. Note: This only applies if the first part in the assembly is placed into, and not created from scratch in the context of the assembly.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
285
Assembly Panel Bar Similar to the Part Modeling Panel Bar, the Assembly Panel Bar contains the tools specific to assembly modeling. As you create your assembly model, the Panel Bar will automatically switch between Assembly, Part, and Sketch modes depending on the context you are using. Procedure
Note the keyboard shortcuts next to each icon. Enter these key sequences to start the related tool.
Assembly Panel Bar
After you become familiar with the assembly tool icons, you can switch the panel bar to expert mode. At the top of the panel bar, select the Assembly Panel drop-down, then select Expert.
By setting the Panel Bar to expert mode, you will make more room available for the Assembly/Part browser.
286
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Exercise: Introduction to Assembly Modeling In this exercise, you will create a basic assembly model using some of the concepts mentioned in this lesson. Some techniques performed during this lesson will be covered in greater detail later in this chapter. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals, click Exercise: Introduction to Assembly Modeling
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Completed Assembly
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
287
Assembly Browser Overview Overview
Overview The Assembly Browser offers several options for working in the assembly environment and is your primary tool for interacting with the assembly components and features. In this lesson you will learn about the various options available through the Assembly Browser.
5-Axis Robot Assembly
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to
288
•
Activate and edit parts in the context of the assembly
•
Control the visibility of parts in an assembly
•
Resequence and Restructure an assembly
•
Create browser filters and utilize them in an assembly
•
Enable and disable components in an assembly
•
Identify grounded components in an assembly and how they effect other assembly components
•
Create and use Design Views
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
In-Place Activation In-Place Activation means you activate a part in the context of the assembly. In order to edit a part in the context of the assembly, you must activate the part. There are a few options available for activating a part in-place. Procedure
•
In the Browser or graphics window, double-click on the part.
•
In the Browser or graphics window, right-click on the part and on the shortcut menu click Edit.
•
In the Browser or graphics window, right-click on the part and on the shortcut menu click Open. This option will open the part in a separate window. Any changes to the part are automatically reflected in the assembly.
In-Place Activation - Shortcut Menu
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
289
Result of In-Place Activation When a part is activated in the context of the assembly, the assembly environment changes. •
In the Browser, the background behind all other parts is greyed.
•
In the Browser, the part is automatically expanded to expose the part features.
•
The Panel Bar switches to display the modeling tools.
•
In the graphics window, the non-active parts are dimmed.
Assembly Browser - Active Part and Active Part in the Context of the Assembly
290
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Visibility Control It is possible to control the visibility of all elements in the assembly. While you work in the context of the assembly, in the Assembly Browser or graphics window, right-click on an element in the assembly and select Visibility on the shortcut menu. Check mark indicates the part is currently visible. Procedure
Browser Appearance In the Assembly browser, parts with the visibility property turned off appear grey.
Browser Part Visibility
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
291
Assembly Resequence It is possible to resequence the order of parts in the assembly. Parts are displayed in the browser in the order in which they are placed or created. Resequencing the assembly enables you to place the parts in a more logical order. Procedure
To resequence the assembly, in the browser, click and drag on the part and release the mouse at its new position.
Assembly Resequencing
Assembly Restructure As you create your assembly, at some point you may need to organize the assembly by placing components into subassemblies. By restructuring the assembly you are creating subassemblies and placing existing parts into the subassembly. Procedure
Access Methods The following methods are available for restructuring your assembly.
292
Shortcut Menu
In the browser or graphics window, select one or more parts then right-click on a part and select Demote
Keyboard Shortcut
Select one or more parts and press TAB
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
When you restructure an assembly using the Demote tool, the Create In-Place Component dialog box appears.
Create In-Place Dialog Box
New File Name: Enter a file name for the subassembly. New File Location: Enter or browse the location for the new subassembly. Template: Select a template to use for the new subassembly.
Assembly Restructure Constraint Warning
Assembly Restructure Constraint Warning Dialog Box
When restructuring parts into subassemblies, there is a potential that you will loose some assembly constraints during the restructuring process. When possible, you should restructure all parts to be included in the subassembly, at the same time. If you restructure the parts separately you will loose the assembly constraints and will need to recreate them. To restructure all parts in one step, select all the parts in the browser or graphics window and then select the Demote tool. This will place all selected parts into the new subassembly and maintain the constraints. Constraints applied to parts residing in the same assembly will be maintained if they are restructured into a new subassembly at the same time. Constraints applied to parts residing in different assemblies and subassemblies will not be maintained.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
293
Drag and Drop Restructuring If a subassembly already exists, it is possible to restructure the assembly by dragging parts from the top level assembly to the subassembly. It is also possible to drag and drop parts from the subassembly to the top level assembly. Depending on the constraint conditions, you may loose assembly constraints using this method.
Drag and Drop Restructuring
294
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Browser Filters You can filter the display of information in the browser by using the browser filters. As your assembly grows in complexity, the browser filters can assist you by streamlining its information. At the top of the Assembly Browser, click the Filter button and the filter menu is displayed. Procedure
Hide Work Features: Hides all work features including the Origin folders. Show Children Only: Displays only first level children. Hides parts contained within a subassembly when the top-level assembly is active. Hide Notes: Hides all notes attached to features. Hide Documents: Hides inserted documents. Hide Warnings: Hides warning symbols attached to constraints in the browser.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
295
Browser Display Mode When you work in an assembly the Assembly browser display mode defaults to Position View. It displays the parts and assembly constraints. You can change the display mode to Modeling View by selecting the Position Mode drop-down menu at the top of the browser. The Modeling View will display the parts and their features. This mode enables you to identify part features and activate them for editing without having to activate the part. Procedure
Assembly Browser Display Modes
When you examine the images above, note the appearance of the assembly constraints while in the Position View and the part features while in Modeling View. While in the Modeling View, note also the Constraints folder at the top. Expand this folder to expose the assembly constraints.
296
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Enabled Components By default, when you place components into an assembly, they are enabled. When a component is enabled you have access to the component for editing and applying constraints. When a component is not enabled, it appears dimmed in the graphics window and its icon color in the browser changes to green. Concept
When you open an assembly, the data structure of enabled components is available while components that are not enabled, only the graphics information is loaded. For large assemblies this is beneficial to increasing overall system performance.
Assembly with Component Not Enabled
In the browser or graphics window, right-click on the part and on the shortcut menu, click Enabled. A check mark indicates the part is currently enabled.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
297
Grounded Components By default, the first part in each assembly is grounded. All degrees of freedom are removed from the component and it cannot be moved. When you apply constraints to a grounded component, the non-grounded component will move to validate the constraint while the grounded component remains fixed in its position. Concept
Although the first part is grounded, there is no limit to the number of grounded parts that you can have in an assembly. You can also remove the grounded property from the first part in the assembly. When you ground parts you can use them to mimic real-world situation where some parts are fixed in position, while others will move relative to the parts to which they have been constrained. Grounded components appear in the browser with the Push Pin icon. In the browser or graphics window, right-click on the part and on the shortcut menu, click Grounded.
Grounded Components in Browser
298
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Design Views When you create a new assembly file, a separate Design View file is automatically created. Design Views are used to store assembly display configurations that you can recall the next time you work on the assembly. Procedure
Several different properties are stored within the design view. For example, as you work on an assembly, you may need to turn the visibility off of several components to work on parts internally. If you save the display configuration as a new design view, you can recall that configuration by activating the design view. You can also use Design views as the basis for Drawing and Presentation views. Design Views are stored in the same directory as the assembly and by default have the same name as the assembly with an *.idv extension The following properties are stored within design view. •
Component visibility (visible or not visible)
•
Sketch and work feature visibility
•
Component enabled status
•
Color and style properties applied in the assembly
•
Zoom and viewing angle
•
Browser display mode (Position or Modeling)
Access Methods The following methods are available for accessing Design Views. Browser Menu Area
Pull Down Menu
View > Design Views
Each Design View file can contain multiple design views. By default there will be three design views created. •
system.nothing visible: Built-in design view that when activated will turn the visibility of all components off.
•
system.all visible: Built-in design view that when activated will turn the visibility of all components on.
•
UserName.default: This design view is automatically created and is based Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
299
upon your system user name.
Design Views Dialog Box
Storage Location: Represents the current storage location for the design view file. New: Click to create a new design view file. Browse: Click to browse for a design view file. Design View: Lists the name of the currently selected design view. Enter a new design view name. Save: Click to save the current display configuration as a design view. Delete: Click to delete the selected design view. Apply: Click to activate the selected design view.
300
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Exercise: Assembly Browser In this exercise, you will open an assembly file and use the Assembly Browser to perform several tasks. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals, click Exercise: Assembly Browser
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
5-Axis Robot Assembly
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
301
Placing Components in an Assembly Overview Overview
Overview As you create assemblies you place component geometry that represents the assembly's individual parts. In this lesson you will learn about several different ways you can place components into an assembly.
Completed Robot Assembly
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to
302
•
Use the Place Component tool to place parts into an assembly
•
Utilize sources other than Autodesk Inventor software to place components
•
Drag components into an assembly
•
Replace components in an assembly
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
The Place Component Tool You use the Place Component tool to place components into the assembly. Select this tool and the Open dialog box will be displayed. The same options for opening files are available, however the end result is the selected file will be placed into the assembly file instead of opened for editing. Procedure
The first component you place into the assembly will be automatically placed at the assembly's origin point (0,0,0) and will be grounded. You can place additional occurrences of the part by clicking different locations in the graphics window. After you place the part into the assembly, right-click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu.
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Place Component tool. Panel Bar
Shortcut Menu
Keyboard Shortcut
P
Open Dialog Box
Select the file to place into the assembly and click Open. To place files other than Autodesk Inventor software files, select the file type in the Files of type drop-down list.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
303
Placing Components - Process Overview The following steps are an overview for using the Place Component tool to place components into the assembly.
304
1. 2. 3.
Open or create a new assembly file. On the Panel Bar, click the Place Component tool. In the Open dialog box, select the file you want to place into the assembly, and click Open.
4.
The first component in the assembly is positioned automatically and is grounded. Optionally place additional components by clicking other locations in the graphics window, or press ESC to cancel.
5.
On the Panel Bar, click the Place Component tool and continue to place components into the assembly.
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Sources of Placed Components As you use Autodesk Inventor software to build assemblies you can use geometry from other applications as parts in your assembly. The following list represents the supported formats that you can place into an assembly. Concept
•
Autodesk Inventor parts and assemblies. (*.ipt, *.iam)
•
Autodesk Mechanical Desktop (*.dwg)
•
AutoCAD (*.dwg)
•
SAT files (*.sat) (ACIS/ShapeManager)
•
IGES files (*.igs, *.ige, *.iges)
•
STEP files (*.stp, *.ste, *.step)
•
Pro Engineer (*.prt, *.asm)
Different capabilities are available with each of these formats. Some formats will be converted to Autodesk Inventor files when placed into an assembly, but others such as Autodesk Mechanical Desktop will be linked to the assembly. Any changes in the Autodesk Mechanical Desktop file, would be reflected in the assembly.
Supported File Types In the Open dialog box, select the Files of type drop-down list to display the supported file types.
Supported Formats
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
305
Mechanical Desktop Parts in an Autodesk Inventor Assembly
The image above represents an Autodesk Mechanical Desktop part used in an Autodesk Inventor assembly. Right-click on the part and then select Open to open the part in Autodesk Mechanical Desktop. Changes to the part would be reflected in the assembly.
306
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Dragging Components into an Assembly You can drag components into an assembly from other open part files or from Windows Explorer. This results in the component being placed into the assembly just as if you had used the Place Component tool. Procedure
In the image below, the active part file, robo_hand.ipt is being dragged into the nonactive but open assembly.
Dragging an Open Part File into an Assembly
In the image below, a component is being dragged into the assembly from a Windows Explorer window.
Dragging Components from Windows Explorer
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
307
When you drag components from a Windows Explorer window, make certain the location of the component is referenced in the current Project file. If not, the following message will appear.
The message means that the current location is not referenced in the Project file. As a result Autodesk Inventor may not be able to locate the file the next time the assembly is opened. Click OK to place the component in the assembly. If you place the component in the assembly, you must edit the Project paths before re-opening the assembly to include component location or move the component to a location identified within the current project.
308
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Replacing Components As you build assemblies, you may need to replace components. For example when you start the assembly, you may not have access to all the required parts. In the meantime you place a proxy part in place of the final part. After you receive the required geometry, you can use the Replace tool to replace the proxy part with the final version. Procedure
When you replace components in an assembly, some assembly constraints will be lost and need to be recreated. Autodesk Inventor software will attempt to retain the constraints, but the result depends largely on the differences in geometry between the existing component and the replacement component. When the component is replaced, the new version is placed in the same location as the existing version. The origin of the new component is coincident with the origin of the component being replaced. There are two versions of the Replace component tool: - Replaces only the selected component. - Replaces all occurrences of the selected component.
Access Methods The following methods are available for access the Replace component tool. Panel Bar
Keyboard Shortcut
CTRL+H > Replace SHIFT+H > Replace All
Possible Constraint Loss Dialog Box
When you replace components in an assembly the Possible Constraint Loss dialog box will appear. Click OK to continue and replace the selected component, or click Cancel to cancel the operation.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
309
Replacing Components - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for replacing components.
310
1.
In the browser or graphics window, select the component to be replaced.
2.
On the Panel Bar, click the Replace component tool and in the Open dialog box, double-click on the replacement component. If the Possible Constraint Loss dialog box appears, click OK to replace the component.
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
3.
To replace multiple occurrences of the same part, select one of the occurrences and on the Panel Bar, click the Replace All tool.
4. 5.
In the Open dialog box, double-click on the replacement component. Click OK in the Possible Constraint Loss dialog box.
6.
All occurrences of the selected component are replaced.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
311
Exercise: Placing Components in an Assembly In this exercise, you use the techniques covered in this lesson to place components into a new assembly. After you place the components, you will use the Replace Component tool to replace components in the assembly. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals, click Exercise: Placing Components in an Assembly
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Completed Robot Assembly
312
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Creating Components in an Assembly Overview Overview
Overview Creating components in an assembly enables you to design parts in the context of the assembly in which they will reside. This technique enables you to take advantage of other part features in the assembly to create new geometry and validate this new geometry based upon the design intent. In this lesson you will learn how to create components in the context of an assembly.
Components Created In-Place
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to •
Create parts in the context of the assembly
•
Use work features in assemblies
•
Use 2D sketches in an assembly
•
Use projected edges and features
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
313
Creating Parts in Place Creating parts in the context of the assembly enables you to take advantage of other geometry in the assembly by referencing the features of other parts to assist in the creation of new parts. Commonly referred to as Top-Down assembly modeling, this approach enables you to design new parts in the assembly environment in which they will reside. Procedure
Benefits to Creating Parts in Place The following list represents some of the benefits of creating parts in the context of the assembly. •
Ability to reference other parts in the assembly.
•
Ability to validate function within the assembly.
•
Ability to create adaptive relationships between parts.
•
Presents a better picture of the overall design intent.
Example of Creating a Part in Place
Access Methods The following methods are available for accessing the Create Component tool. Panel Bar
Keyboard Shortcut
314
N
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Create In-Place Component Dialog Box
New FIle Name: Enter a name for the new file. File Type: Select the file type in the drop-down list. •
Part: Select to create a new part file.
•
Assembly: Select to create subassembly.
New File Location: Enter the location for the new part or assembly file. Template: Select a template to use for the new part or assembly file. Browse: Click to browse for a template file. Constrain sketch plane to selected face or plane: Selecting this option will place a flush constraint between the new part and the selected face.
Creating Parts and Subassemblies in Place - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating parts and subassemblies in place. 1. 2.
Open an existing, or create a new, assembly. On the Panel Bar, click the Create Component tool and enter the required values in the Create In-Place Component dialog box. Click OK to create the new part.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
315
316
3.
Select a face or plane to define the initial sketch plane on the new part.
4.
Use the sketching tools available to create new sketch geometry or project geometry from other parts in the assembly.
5.
Use part modeling tools to create the 3D geometry.
6.
To create a subassembly in-place:
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
7.
On the Panel Bar, click the Create Component tool and enter the required values in the Create In-Place Component dialog box. Click OK to create the new subassembly.
8.
Select a face or plane to orient the new subassembly's origin.
9.
The subassembly is automatically activated. You can now create new parts in the context of the subassembly or place components that have already been created.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
317
Using Work Features in Assemblies As you create components in the context of the assembly, remember that the assembly file contains it own coordinate system and origin work features. You can use them to orient sketch planes on new parts and they can serve as the basis for additional work features in new parts. Concept
You will also find the Work Plane, Work Axis, and Work Point tools to create new assembly based work features.
Assembly Work Feature Being Used
318
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Using 2D Sketches You can use 2D sketches in the assembly while you create new parts and validate design intent. As you do, it is not necessary to create 3D features in the initial design phases. You can create the fundamental sketch geometry you need to validate certain features and then exit the part and assign assembly constraints to the 2D parts in the same way you apply constraints to 3D features. Procedure
Using this technique enables you to validate the part's intended function before spending the time required to develop the parts final form.
Constraint Dragging 2D Parts in an Assembly
Using 2D Sketches in the Assembly - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using 2D Sketches in an assembly. 1.
Create a new part in the context of the assembly and use the sketching tools to create only the geometry required to validate function.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
319
320
2.
Exit the part and return to the assembly environment. Apply assembly constraints between the new 2D part and the existing parts.
3.
If required, create additional parts containing 2D geometry and constrain as required.
4.
Validate the components by constraint dragging the 2D parts and/or editing dimensions and/or other constraints.
5.
The 2D parts will react in the assembly the same way as a fully developed 3D part.
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Using Projected Edges and Features Using the same tools to project edges and features in a single part file, you can project edges and features from other parts in the assembly. You can also use this projected geometry to create features on the current part. Using this technique, you can create parts within the assembly with matching or uniform features. Procedure
When you project 2D geometry across parts in the assembly, the resulting geometry will either be associative reference geometry or static reference geometry. Each type offers unique benefits and drawbacks, some of which are beyond the scope of this course. The biggest difference between associative or static reference geometry is what happens to the projected geometry if the originating feature changes. Associative reference geometry maintains a link to the original part and changes if the feature from which it was projected changes. Static reference geometry is not linked back to the originating part and will not change if the source features change. The following table represents some key differences between Associative Reference geometry and Static Reference geometry.
Associative Reference
Static Reference
Receiving part is adaptive
Receiving part is not adaptive
Degrees of freedom on receiving part are reduced.
Degrees of freedom on receiving part are not effected.
Geometry cannot be trimmed or dimensioned
Geometry cannot be trimmed or dimensioned
For more information on the use of projected geometry, refer to the Autodesk Inventor Help system.
Projecting Edges and Features The follow methods are available for accessing the tools to project edges and features. Panel Bar
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
321
To enable or disable the associative reference geometry, on the Tools menu click Application Options. In the Options dialog box, click the Assembly tab and adjust the option accordingly.
Options Dialog Box - Assembly Tab (Partial)
Cross Part Geometry Projection: Selecting this option will create associative reference geometry. Clearing this option will create static reference geometry. If this option is chosen Autodesk Inventor will assign an Adaptive status to the current part and active sketch. Although this adds a degree of flexibility in regards to the design process, it also adds a certain level of complexity to managing the geometry. Adaptivity will be introduced later in this chapter. In the image below, the projected geometry is associative. Note the appearance in the browser and the adaptive icon associated with the adaptive sketch, feature and part.
Projected Associative Reference Geometry
322
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
In the image below, projected geometry is static. Note the appearance of the sketch in the browser. There is no adaptive icon or linked reference to the sketch. When projecting cross-part geometry, static reference geometry is magenta, while associative reference geometry is black.
Projected Static Reference Geometry
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
323
Exercise: Creating Components in an Assembly In this exercise, you will open an assembly and create new components using the techniques learned in this lesson. You will create additional parts in place and project geometry from other parts in the assembly. You will use the 2D sketch geometry to validate assembly function before creating the 3D features. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals, click Exercise: Creating Components in an Assembly
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Components Created In-Place
324
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Moving Components Overview Overview
Overview There are several methods available for moving components in an assembly. The method you choose will largely depend upon the constraint condition of the components and/or the task you need to accomplish. In this lesson you will learn how to move components in an assembly.
Robot Assembly Before Driving Constraints
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to •
Identify the remaining degrees of freedom on a part, and how they are affected by constraints
•
Perform an unconstrained drag
•
Perform a constrained drag
•
Drive assembly constraints
•
Move and rotate components in an assembly
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
325
Degrees of Freedom Each component in an assembly will initially have six degrees of freedom (DOF). They represent how you can move the component along or rotated about each of the X, Y, and Z axes. The degrees of freedom that enable a component to move along an axis, is Translational freedom, while the degrees of freedom that enable a part to rotate about an axis is Rotational freedom. Concept
As you apply assembly constraints to components, you reduce the degrees of freedom for the components being constrained. When a part has no degrees of freedom remaining, it is considered to be fully constrained. You do not have to fully constrain any component in the assembly. In some cases you do not want to fully constrain a component. For example, if you have an assembly with components that are designed to move along a given axis, then you should leave the degrees of freedom to allow that movement.
Degrees of Freedom Symbol
The image above represents the DOF symbol that can be viewed on each part in the assembly.
How to View a Components Degrees of Freedom There are two methods available for viewing the DOF symbol on components in the assembly.
326
•
To view the DOF symbols on all components in the assembly, on the View menu, click Degrees of Freedom or enter SHIFT+E.
•
To view individual component's DOF symbol, right-click on the component, and on the shortcut menu, click Properties. In the Properties dialog box, click the Occurrence tab and select the Degrees of Freedom option.
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Grounded Components Note
When components are grounded in an assembly, all degrees of freedom are removed. Because the first part in each assembly is automatically grounded, it has no degrees of freedom remaining.
The Effect of Constraints on Degrees of Freedom The following steps represent the effect of assembly constraints on degrees of freedom. 1.
A grounded component has no degrees of freedom. The unconstrained component has all six degrees of freedom remaining.
2.
Mate constraint being applied. Three degrees of freedom are removed, three remain.
3.
Flush constraint being applied. Two degrees of freedom removed, one remains.
4.
Flush constraint being applied. No remaining degrees of freedom. Part is fully constrained.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
327
Unconstrained Drag You can move unconstrained components by dragging them in the graphics window. It is sometimes necessary to move components in order to place assembly constraints. Procedure
Unconstrained Drag
Constrained Drag To perform a constrained drag you click and drag on a component that is constrained in the assembly. You are able to drag the component in the directions allowed by the remaining degrees of freedom. Other components constrained to the selected component will also move based upon their remaining degrees of freedom. Procedure
328
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Constraint Drivers As you build assemblies and add constraints to the parts, you may need to visualize the assembly in motion to see how the components interact with each other. Driving constraints makes this visualization possible. Procedure
When you create assembly constraints, each constraint type contains a property representing an offset or angle value. When you drive a constraint, these values are assigned a Start and End value. You animate the assembly by driving the constraints through the range specified. While you drive the constraint, other assembly constraints are constantly evaluated and the assembly components are only allowed to move through the available degrees of freedom for each component.
Access Methods The following methods are available for accessing the Drive Constraints tool. Shortcut Menu
Right-click on a constraint and select Drive Constraint
Drive Constraint Dialog Box
Start: Enter a minimum value for the current constraint. For angular constraint, this value will be an angle format, for all other constraints, this value will represent a distance. End: Enter a maximum value for the current constraint. Pause Delay: Enter a delay in seconds to be applied between steps.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
329
Player Controls: Use the standard player controls to drive the constraint through its sequence. Click to record the sequence to a standard AVI format. Minimize dialog during recording: When selected, the dialog box will be minimized while recording the sequence. Drive Adaptivity: When selected, will allow adaptive parts to update if necessary based upon changes in the assembly. Collision Detection: When selected, the assembly is analyzed for interference as each component moves through its sequence. If a collision is detected, the motion is stopped at the point of interference. Increment: Select the method for calculating the increment of simulation. •
Amount of value: Uses the value below to increment each step of the sequence.
•
Total # of steps: Uses the value below for the total number of steps for the sequence.
•
Value: Enter a value for the increment method.
Repetitions: •
Start/End: Runs the sequence from its Start position to its End position.
•
Start/End/Start: Runs the sequence from its Start position to its End position and back to its Start position.
AVI rate: Specifies frame rate when recording the simulation.
330
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Driving Constraints - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for driving assembly constraints. 1.
In the browser, right-click on the constraint and on the shortcut menu, click Drive Constraint.
2.
In the Drive constraint dialog box, enter a Start and End value, adjust other settings as required and click the Play button to drive the constraint.
3.
The assembly constraint is driven through its Start and End positions.
Driving More Than One Constraint Note
Although it is beyond the scope of this course, through the use of parameters and formulas it is possible to drive more than one constraint at a time. Refer to the Advanced Assembly Modeling course from Autodesk, Inc. for more information.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
331
Moving and Rotating Components To move constrained components in an assembly to facilitate adding additional constraints you use either Move Component or Rotate Component tools. When you use these tools on a component in the assembly, the assembly constraints are temporarily ignored, enabling you to move or rotate the components independently from the degrees of freedom that may be remaining on the part. Using these tools, you can move components in the assembly just as if they were not constrained at all. Procedure
To move or rotate a component in the assembly, select the appropriate tool then click and drag on the part being moved or rotated. After you move or rotate the component click the Update button on the Standard toolbar to reapply the assembly constraints.
Access Methods The following methods are available for accessing the Move and Rotate Component tools. Panel Bar
Keyboard Shortcuts
V = Move G = Rotate
Rotating Components - Potential Cursors
332
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
When you rotate components, the 3D Rotate symbol appears similar to the 3D Rotate symbol when rotating views. Click and drag in the appropriate location to rotate the component.
Moving or Rotating Grounded Components Note
If you move or rotate a grounded component, it will not move back to its original location after performing an Update.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
333
Exercise: Moving Components In this exercise, you will open an assembly and view the available degrees of freedom on different components. You will then use the techniques learned in this lesson to move the components and drive assembly constraints. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals, click Exercise: Moving Components
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Robot Assembly Before Driving Constraints
334
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Constraining Components Overview Overview
Overview When you build assemblies you define parametric relationships between the parts in the assembly. The relationships created between parts using assembly constraints, realistically mimics real-world situations and operating conditions of the assembly components. You apply assembly constraints to the parts to define their position and available degrees of freedom. You use the Constraint tool or the ALT-Drag method to apply constraints without using the Place Constraint dialog box. After you apply the constraints, there are a couple of ways to view the constraints in the browser, and if necessary edit the constraints. In this lesson you will learn how to apply, view, and edit assembly constraints.
LCD-Mount Assembly
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to •
Understand how assembly constraints effect individual parts in the assembly
•
Apply and edit basic assembly constraints in the assembly
•
View assembly constraints in the browser
•
Use the ALT-Drag method to apply assembly constraints
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
335
Placing Constraints You apply each assembly constraint to either two components in the assembly or to one component and one assembly origin feature. When you start the Constraint tool, after you select the type of constraint, you will select one feature on each part to apply it. The geometry that you choose is dependent upon the type of constraint you apply. The features to which the constraints are applied can be geometric part features, or work features (work planes, axes, or points) at the assembly or part level. Concept
There are four types of assembly constraints that can be applied between parts: mate, angle, tangent, an insert. The constraint type chosen will depend upon the part features and the design intent.
Example of Assembly Constraint
Simple but complete When you apply assembly constraints to parts, you should apply the constraints using the simplest approach possible while using constraint solutions that will constrain the parts as completely as required by the design intent. You are not required to fully constrain parts in the assembly, but parts should not be left unconstrained, or with constraint conditions that do not fully represent the intended function of the part in the assembly. If a component in an assembly is not intended to be constrained to other components, then it should be grounded or constrained to assembly level work features. As you plan the constraints, mimic the real world conditions of the parts in the assembly by using assembly constraint solutions that most closely resemble how the parts will be assembled after manufacturing. Using this approach enables you to develop an assembly of parts that interact as intended with other parts in the assembly.
336
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
In the image below, you could use a variety of different constraint solutions to assemble these two components. However after analyzing how the components will be put together, the proper constraint is used to mimic the real world process of assembling the two components.
Example of Proper Constraint Planning
Placing Constraints on Obstructed Geometry Tip
When placing constraints on obstructed geometry or features, on the Standard toolbar, select the Hidden Edge Display options to display all edges on the parts.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
337
How to Place Constraints - Process Overview Although each type of constraint will create a different result, the overall process of applying constraints is the same. The following steps represent an overview for applying constraints.
338
1.
Open or create an assembly.
2.
On the Panel Bar, click the Constraint tool and select the type of constraint to apply.
3.
Select the features to apply the constraints. Depending on the type of constraint, and the geometry chosen, you are given a preview of how the constraint will be applied.
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
4.
If necessary adjust the solution option and enter an offset or angle value.
5.
Click apply to create the constraint then continue to add additional constraints as required.
6.
Additional constraints being applied.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
339
Basic Constraints There are four basic assembly constraints. Each are designed to create a certain constraint condition between the components in the assembly. Procedure
Panel Bar
Keyboard Shortcut
C
Place Constraint Dialog Box
Type: Select the type of constraint to create. Selections: As you select features, the selection1 and selection2 buttons are automatically activated. If you need to change a selected feature, click the appropriate selection button and reselect the geometry. Pick Part First: This option limits the feature selections to the selected part. You must first select the part, then select the feature for the constraint. This option is usually used in situations where the feature you are attempting to constrain is obstructed by other parts in the assembly. Offset/Angle: The label for this field will change depending on the type of constraint you select. Enter a value for the offset or angle of the constraint. Solution: Each constraint type offers different solutions. Refer to the section below for available solution options for each. Preview Constraint: This option previews the constraint before applying. The components will move into position, enabling you to preview the constraint and confirm or change the constraint settings. Predict Offset and Orientation: Only available for Mate and Angle constraints, this option automatically inserts the angle or offset value if the offset field is blank. The offset or angle value is calculated based upon the
340
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
part's current position and is inserted into the offset/angle field. To override this setting, enter the offset/angle value manually. This is useful in applying constraints without moving the geometry from its current position.
Mate Constraint You use the mate constraint to mate selected geometry. Valid selections include faces, planes, axes, edges, and points. You can also enter an offset value to offset the geometry. Solution Options: Mate: Selected geometry will be mated to each other. Flush: Selected faces will be coplanar. The following represents examples using the Mate constraint.
Mate Constraint/Mate Solution - Axis/Axis
Mate Constraint/Mate Solution - Face/Face
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
341
Mate Constraint/Mate Solution - Point/Point
Mate Constraint/Flush Solution - Face/Face
Angle Constraint Use the angle constraint to specify an angle between faces, planes, or lines. Solution Options: Directed Angle: Using this solution option, the angle is measured by using the right-hand rule. Undirected Angle: This is the default solution and it allows either orientation of the angle constraint. This helps resolve situations in which the component's orientation flips during a constraint drive or drag.
Angle Constraint - Face/Face
342
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Tangent Constraint Use the tangent constraint to define a tangency condition between one circular feature and plane or face, or between two circular features. Solution Options: Inside: Creates an inside tangent solution. Outside: Creates an outside tangent solution.
Tangent Constraint/Outside Solution - Circular Face - Circular Face:
Insert Constraint Use the insert constraint to insert a circular part feature into another circular part feature. This requires the selection of two circular edges. The center point of the edge is calculated and the result is a constraint in which the center lines are aligned and the selected edges are made coplanar. Solution Options: Opposed: This solution will force the face normals to be opposed. Aligned: This solution will align the face normals.
Insert Constraint
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
343
Viewing Constraints After you create the assembly constraints you can view them in the browser different ways. If you select a constraint in the browser it will highlight the geometry referenced by the constraint. Procedure
Constraint Geometry Highlighted
Browser - Position View When you create assembly constraints, each part or origin feature is associated with one-half of the constraint; for example, when the browser is in the default Position View. Each constraint is listed twice in the browser. This image displays how the assembly constraint appears under each part that it has been applied. If you need to edit, suppress, or delete a constraint, you can access the constraint under either part.
Viewing Assembly Constraints in the Browser
344
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Browser - Modeling View If you change the browser view to Modeling View, the constraints appear under the Constraints folder. You can expand the folder to access the constraints. Using this view places all the constraints in one location however, it can be difficult to identify constraints on specific parts in larger assemblies.
Assembly Constraints in Browser - Modeling View
Shortcut Menu Options In the browser, if you right-click on a constraint the following shortcut menu is displayed. Find in Window: Zooms the current view to geometry containing the selected constraint. This assists you in identifying the constraint graphically. Other Half: This option highlights the other half of the constraint, by expanding the other component to which it has been applied and highlighting the constraint. This option helps identify which components the constraint has been applied to.
Constraint Shortcut Menu Options
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
345
Editing Constraints You can edit the constraint much the same way you edit placed features. Locate the constraint in the browser, then right-click on the constraint and on the shortcut menu, click Edit. Procedure
Editing Constraints
When you edit a constraint, all edits are done in the same dialog box used to create the constraint. All options can be changed including the type of constraint.
Editing Constraints
346
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Changing the Constraint Offset/Angle Value There are two methods to change the constraint offset/angle value without using the Edit Constraint dialog box. •
Using the Edit Box at the bottom of the browser: Selecting a constraint will cause the Edit Box to appear at the bottom of the browser. Enter a new offset/angle value for the constraint and press ENTER.
•
Using the Edit Dimension dialog box: In the browser, right-click on the constraint and on the shortcut menu, click Modify. The Edit Dimension dialog box will appear. Enter a new offset/angle value and press ENTER or click the green check mark.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
347
Using ALT-Drag to Place Constraints The ALT-Drag method is an alternate method for placing assembly constraints. Hold the ALT key down, then click and drag on the feature receiving the constraint. A constraint glyph will appear indicating the type of constraint being applied. Continue to drag the cursor to another part in the assembly and touch another valid feature. Then release the mouse button to create the assembly constraint. Procedure
ALT-Drag Constraint Glyph
ALT-Drag Constraint Types When you use the ALT-Drag method to apply constraints, the constraint type is based upon the geometry you select. You can change the constraint type by pressing the appropriate key. Release the ALT key but you must continue to hold down the left mouse button. • Mate: M or 1 • Angle: A or 2 • Tangent: T or 3 • Insert: I or 4
348
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
ALT-Drag to Place Constraints - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using the ALT-Drag method to apply assembly constraints. 1.
While holding the ALT key, select the feature to be constrained and while holding the left mouse button down, drag the part. You can release the ALT key but you must hold the mouse button down.
2.
While holding the mouse button down, drag the part to the next feature to assign the constraint and release the mouse when the part is in place.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
349
Exercise: Constraining Components In this exercise, you use the concepts and techniques learned in this lesson to constrain components in the assembly. After you apply the constraints you will edit some constraints to see the effect on the assembly. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals, click Exercise: Constraining Components
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
LCD-Mount Assembly
350
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Adaptive Components Overview Overview
Overview Adaptivity is intended to give the designer a way to create parts that can adapt to the assembly in which they are being used. Historically, parametric modeling systems required the use of complex cross-part parametric equations in order for one part to change size if another part in the assembly changed. One problem with this technique, is that cross-part parametric equations could become so complex, that even the original designer could have problems managing the relationship and equations used in such an environment. With the introduction of Adaptivity, Autodesk Inventor enables the designer to create adaptive relationships between parts in an assembly, that do not require the use of complex cross-part parameters. Largely based upon assembly constraints, Adaptivity enables a part to change based upon changes in other parts in the assembly to which it has been constrained. Furthermore, with Autodesk Inventor you can mix both Parametric dimensions and adaptivity within the same part and/or assembly. Thus, you can control the design intent by using the most appropriate technique. Although an in depth discussion of Adaptivity is beyond the scope of the course, you will learn the essential aspects of creating adaptive assemblies using Autodesk Inventor.
Completed Assembly with Adaptive Parts
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to •
Understand adaptive features and how you use them
•
Create adaptive features and sketches
•
Use adaptive occurrences in an assembly and control them with constraints Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
351
Introduction to Adaptive Features Adaptivity is not intended to be used in all parts and assemblies. The key to using adaptive features effectively is knowing when to use them. Concept
When you create a part containing adaptive features, their size is allowed to change when the assembly conditions require them to do so in order to successfully resolve constraints and associative sketches. You can use different approaches to create adaptive features, for example, you can design the part outside of the assembly and make specific features adaptive for later use, or create a part in the context of the assembly, and project geometry from other parts in the assembly, to automatically create adaptive features. In the example below, the gasket component was created by using an adaptive crosspart projection from the flange component. By changing dimensions on the flange component, the gasket features change to match the changes on the flange.
Adaptive Component - Before and After
Identifying Adaptive Parts and Features Parts and features are identified in the browser with an adaptive icon indicating the adaptive status. It must be present at each level in order for adaptivity to function. At minimum you will have two adaptive indicators: (a) at the part level in the assembly, and (b) at the feature level. The adaptive indicator only appears at the sketch level if the sketch contains associative geometry or has been set to be adaptive.
352
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
When to Use Adaptive Features The following list represents some of the occasions to use adaptivity. •
Your part contains features that are largely dependent for size or position, with other parts in the assembly.
•
Your parts share common sketch geometry such as mating flanges.
•
You need an easy way to update parts in the assembly when changes are required.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
353
Methods for Creating Adaptive Features There are two methods available for creating adaptive features. The method you choose depends upon the design intent and which aspects of the geometry needs to be adaptive. While some adaptive features may only require certain parameters, such as extrusion distance, to change others may require the underlying sketch geometry to change as well. Procedure
•
Using an associative reference sketch to create a feature. When you create parts in the context of the assembly, you can project geometry from other parts onto the current sketch. Depending upon the current Application Options settings, this geometry will either be associative reference or static. When the result of the geometry you project is associative reference geometry, the sketch is automatically set to be adaptive and any changes to the originating geometry will reflect in the reference geometry. To access this setting, on the Tools menu, click Application Options and click the Assembly tab.
Use Associative Reference Sketches to •
•
354
Create a new component with features that need to mate with other features in the assembly. • Create a new component with features whose size and position are dependent upon the features of other parts in the assembly. For example a flange and end cap. • Create features that mate with a zero clearance. Create an underconstrained feature, and then make it adaptive. You create the sketch geometry and intentionally leave the geometry underconstrained. In order for a sketch feature to adapt, it must be underconstrained specifically on the elements of the sketch that you require to be adaptive. After you create the feature, in the browser, right-click on the
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
feature and click Adaptive on the shortcut menu.
Assign specific feature properties as adaptive. Each feature you create has specific properties can be set as adaptive. For example, a hole feature has the following properties that can be set as adaptive.
• •
• Sketch (must be underconstrained) • Hole Depth • Nominal Diameter • Counterbore Diameter • Counterbore Depth Any or all of these features can be set as adaptive in the Feature Properties dialog box. Use Underconstrained Adaptive Features to • • • • •
Create adaptive relationships with 2D layout sketch geometry. Create adaptive relationships when there is no existing geometry to project. Create adaptive relationships before you know which parts in the assembly you will constrain the adaptive features to. Adapt a feature to a component in another assembly level. Creating mating features and control assembly clearances with constraint offset values.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
355
Adaptive Sketches You create adaptive sketches by projecting cross-part geometry as associative reference geometry. If the originating geometry changes, the changes are automatically reflected in the referencing associative sketch. Procedure
Adaptive Sketch Example
In the image above, the Adaptive-Gasket's base feature sketch geometry is projected from the underlying flange part. If changes to the flange's sketch geometry occur, they will be automatically reflected in the projected adaptive sketch.
Creating Adaptive Sketches - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating adaptive sketches.
356
1.
Open or create an assembly containing at least one part.
2.
On the Tools menu, click Application Options. In the Options dialog box, click the Assembly tab and confirm that the Enable Associative Edge/Loop Geometry Projection During In-Place Modeling is selected, then click OK.
3.
Create a new part in the context of the assembly and activate the sketch to receive to associative reference geometry. With sketch activated, on the Panel Bar, click the Project Geometry tool and select the edges or loops to be projected onto the new
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
part. To project single edges, select the edges specifically, to project a loop, select a point inside the edges.
4.
The projected geometry will appear on the sketch and in the browser as an adaptive reference.
5.
Use the projected sketch geometry to create the required sketched features.
6.
If necessary make changes to the original part and view the changes reflected in the adaptive part.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
357
Adaptive Features You create Adaptive features by leaving certain aspects of the feature underconstrained. By leaving the geometry underconstrained, it is able to adapt to other features based upon assembly constraints. You do this by leaving dimensions and/or constraints off of sketch geometry, or by making specific feature properties, such as an extrusion distance, adaptive. Procedure
In the image below, the adaptive part is created with the initial sketch intentionally underconstrained. Using Mate and Flush assembly constraints, the adaptive part is driven through a series of updates and changes in size.
Adaptive Feature Example
In the browser, right-click on a feature and select Properties on the shortcut menu. The feature properties dialog box contains an Adaptive section enabling you to determine which aspects of the feature are allowed to adapt. The options available will depend upon the type of feature selected.
Feature Properties Dialog Box
358
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Creating Adaptive Features - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating adaptive features. 1.
Create a new part in the assembly with an underconstrained sketch.
2.
Create the part as required using standard sketch features.
3.
In the browser, right-click on the feature and select Adaptive from the shortcut menu.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
359
4.
Add assembly constraints according to the design intent. The adaptive part will update to validate the assembly constraint.
5.
Continue to add assembly constraints as required by the design intent. The part feature updates to validate the assembly constraint.
6.
Continue to add assembly constraints as required by the design intent. The part feature updates to validate the assembly constraint.
Setting Initial Adaptive Feature Status Note
360
You can set part features to be adaptive automatically as soon as they are created. On the Tools menu, click Application Options. In the Options dialog box, click the Assembly tab and select the Features are initially adaptive option.
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Adaptive Occurrence in Assemblies When you add a part to an assembly that was created outside of the assembly and contains adaptive features, the part's adaptive status is not initially set. To set the part as adaptive, in the browser or graphics window, right-click on the part, then click Adaptive on the shortcut menu. Procedure
When you constrain the adaptive part to fixed features on other components, the under constrained features on the adaptive part will resize to validate the assembly constraints. In an assembly containing multiple occurrences of an adaptive part, only one occurrence can be specified as adaptive. Any changes made to the adaptive occurrence will be automatically reflected in other occurrences. When a component is being used adaptively in one assembly, it cannot be used adaptively in another. It is important to note that any changes to the adaptive part, caused by adaptivity, or other modifications, will be reflected in every assembly in which the part is used. If you require the same part to be adaptive in multiple assemblies, you can use the Save Copy As command and save the part with a unique name for each adaptive occurrence you require in other assemblies. The image below represents two assembly files, each containing a reference to the PinA component. In the Adaptive-Occurrence.iam file, note that only one occurrence of the Pin-A component is set to be adaptive. All other occurrences in the assembly will update to reflect the adaptive changes. In the Tri-Assembly.iam file, the same Pin-A component is being referenced. Because it is used adaptively in the AdaptiveOccurrences.iam file, it cannot be used adaptively in this assembly. Also, changes to the Pin-A component forced by adaptivity in the first assembly, are also reflected in the second assembly. As a result, in this example, the Pin-A component no longer fits the hole size of the Tri-Base.ipt.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
361
Applying Assembly Constraints You apply Assembly constraints to adaptive parts the same way you apply constraints to non-adaptive components. When you apply assembly constraints to adaptive components, the component will move according to the remaining degrees of freedom before it adapts. An adaptive change will only occur when there are no remaining degrees of freedom that can be used to validate the constraint. Procedure
The image below represents a common error that can occur when you apply constraints to adaptive components. Although the message does not give details about the specific problem, when you use adaptive parts, it means that either some aspect of the feature's properties is not specified to be adaptive, or a constraint or dimension is preventing the adaptive change to occur. When this message appears, Cancel or Accept the message, and investigate the adaptive component's features, and sketch geometry. If you click Cancel, you will have to reapply the constraint. If you click Accept, the constraint will be saved in an error state. After you resolve the adaptive issue, the constraint will be validated automatically.
Common Assembly Constraint Error
Tips and Considerations for Using Adaptivity The following list represents some tips and consideration for using Adaptivity. Procedure
362
•
Adaptivity is not intended to be the cure all for all cross-part design challenges.
•
For each adaptive part in an assembly, additional processing is required. Depending on the complexity of the assembly and parts, assembly performance can be effected.
•
After the adaptive changes have been applied, turn off the adaptive status of the part in the assembly. This step is critical for performance, as any changes to a feature will force Autodesk Inventor to evaluate the adaptivity. If your assembly contains hundreds (if not thousands) of parts, then performance could be seriously effected.
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Exercise: Adaptive Components In this exercise, you will create three adaptive components in the assembly using both associative reference edges and adaptive features. You will then modify the AdpReservoir component and view the effects on the adaptive components in the assembly. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals, click Exercise: Adaptive Components
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Completed Assembly with Adaptive Parts
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
363
Assembly Analysis Overview Overview
Overview There are different tools available to assist you in analyzing components that are used in an assembly, and finding existing components. In this lesson you will learn to analyze the assembly for interference between parts. You will also learn to perform different surface analyses on parts as well as using the Find option in the open dialog box to locate components based upon certain search criteria.
Completed Interference Analysis
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to •
364
Analyze components in the assembly for interference
•
Analyze faces on the part using the Zebra Style analysis
•
Locate components using the Find option
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
The Analyze Interference Tool As you design components for your assembly, you may need to determine whether or not components in the assembly interfere with each other. The Analyze Interference tool enables you to check for interference between components in the assembly. Procedure
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Analyze Interference tool.
Pull Down Menu
Tools >
Interference Analysis Dialog Box
Define Set #1: Click this button then select the components to include in the first set. You can select components in the browser or in the graphics window. Components within this set will be compared against components in Set #2. Define Set #2: Click this button then select the components to include in the second set. You can select components in the browser or in the graphics window. Components within this set will be compared against components in Set #1. Including components in this set is optional. When the interference analysis is performed, components in Set #1 are checked for interference with components in Set #2. If you define both sets and components within the same set interfere with each other, the interference will not be detected. To check for interference by comparing each component to each other component, select all components for Set #1 and leave Set #2 empty.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
365
If interferences are detected, the Interference Detected dialog box appears, indicating the components and locations of interference. You can copy this information to the clipboard and then paste it into another application. You can also print it for further review.
Interference Detected Dialog Box
Analyzing Interference - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for analyzing the assembly for interference between components. 1. 2.
366
Open an assembly. On the Tools menu, click Analyze Interference and select the components to be included in Set #1.
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
3.
Click the Define Set #2 button and select the components to be compared against the components in Set #1. Then click OK.
4.
If an interference is found, the Interference Detected dialog box appears giving a total number of interferences and the total volume. The areas of interference are indicated in red in the graphics window. You can expand the dialog box for more information and to copy and/or print the results.
Interference Between Threaded Holes and Standard Parts. Tip
To prevent interference between threaded holes and fasteners, use the major diameter option to create the threaded hole.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
367
The Analyze Faces Tool The Analyze Faces tool offers two different analysis styles. You use the Zebra Analysis to analyze consistency between faces and use the Draft Analysis style to analyze the suitability of a part for casting. Procedure
Each style is designed to perform specific analysis and will present the results of the analysis in a unique way. In this lesson you will learn how to perform each of these analyses.
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Analyze Faces tool. Pull Down Menu
Tools >
Standard Toolbar
Toggles the analysis display on/ off.
Zebra Analysis The Zebra Analysis analyzes the selected part or faces by checking for continuity between surfaces.
Analyze Faces Dialog Box - Zebra Analysis
In the Style area click the left button to activate the Zebra Analysis. You use this style to check the continuity between surfaces. New: Click to define a new selection set of faces. Delete: Click to delete the selection set. Definition: Use these options to control the orientation of the pattern, thickness of the stripes, and opacity of the pattern. Selection: In the Selection area, click the arrow button to select the part or faces.
368
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Part: Enables you to select the entire part for analysis. Faces: Enables you to select individual faces for analysis. Click OK or Apply to display the results.
In the example above, the selected faces are being analyzed for continuity along their common edge. The Zebra Stripes make a uniform transition from one face to the other, indicating surface continuity. If there were gaps between the selected faces, the Zebra Stripe pattern would indicate this with a non-uniform transition from one face to the next.
Draft Analysis You use the Draft Analysis style to check the suitability of a part for casting. When you design parts for casting, 90 degree angles can cause problems when trying to pull the mold away from the part. Face drafts are generally used to alleviate this problem by applying slight draft angles between faces. The Draft Analysis style analyzes the selected part or faces and presents the results in a range of colors on the selected part or faces. The colors represent the draft angle range between angles specified.
Analyze Faces Dialog Box - Draft Analysis
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
369
In the Style area click the right button to activate the Draft Analysis. New: Click to define a new selection set of faces. You can define individual selection sets with separate pull-directions. Delete: Click to delete the selection set. Definition: Enter the draft angle range to use for the analysis. Selection: In the Selection area click the arrow button to select the part or faces. Part: Enables you to select the entire part for analysis. Faces: Enables you to select individual faces for analysis. In the Selection area, click the arrow to define, and if necessary flip the pull direction for the current selection set. Click OK or Apply to display the results.
In the example above, the a draft analysis as been performed on the selected faces. The green areas indicate safe draft angles while the red areas indicate 90 degree conditions. The color ranges from blue (negative angle specified) to red (0 degree draft angle) to Green (positive angle specified). Faces represented in Blue or Green, have acceptable draft angles, while Red indicates 0 degree draft angles which could cause problems when trying to pull the mold away from the part.
370
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Locating Components You can use the Find tool to locate files or components within the active assembly. You can create different searches by defining criteria based upon various file properties and save these custom searches for later use. Procedure
There are two slightly different versions of the Find dialog box. You access the Find: Autodesk Inventor Files dialog by clicking the Find button on the Open dialog box. The Find Assembly Components dialog box is accessed by clicking Find on the Edit menu, while working in the context of the assembly. Both tools function the same way, the only difference is that the latter only searches the active assembly file, and highlights and selects the matching components in the browser.
Access Methods Use the following methods to access tools for locating files Autodesk Inventor files. Open Dialog Box
Find
Edit Menu (Assemblies Only) Locates components within the active assembly only.
Find
Keyboard Shortcut (Assemblies Only) Locates components within the active assembly only.
CTRL+F
The main window in each of these dialog boxes lists the current search criteria. You create the search criteria by selecting the property from the Property drop-down list. You then select the appropriate condition and if necessary, provide a value. Click the
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
371
Add to list button to add the criteria to the main window list. Use the Save Search button to save the search for later use, and the Open Search button to load previously saved searches.
Find Autodesk Inventor Files Dialog Box
Build and optionally save the search criteria, then click Find Now to search for Autodesk Inventor files that meet the criteria defined. Build and optionally save the search criteria, then click Find Now to search for components in the active assembly that meet the defined criteria. Components that meet the criteria will be highlighted in the browser. You use this tool for large assemblies, where it would be difficult to manually locate components in the browser.
Find Assembly Components
372
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Exercise: Assembly Analysis In this exercise, you will use the concepts and techniques learned in this lesson to perform an interference analysis on an assembly. You will use the Analyze Faces tool to analyze faces on a part file and complete the exercise by using the Find tool to find various files. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals, click Exercise: Assembly Analysis
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Completed Interference Analysis
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
373
Presentations Overview Overview
Overview You use Presentations files to create exploded views of the assembly. If you require exploded views in your drawing you will first need to create the exploded view in a Presentation file. You can also use the Presentation environment to: •
Help explain and visualize components in the assembly that would otherwise be obstructed from view when the assembly is shown in its assembled condition.
•
Visualize the interaction between parts in the assembly by animating the exploded view to show the assembly's transition between the assembled and exploded states.
The Presentation file is stored as a separate *.ipn file which references the assembly and part files for the geometry. In this lesson you will learn to create exploded views and animations.
Assembly Exploded View
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to
374
•
Create a Presentation View
•
Create Tweaks and Trails in a Presentation View
•
Animate a Presentation View
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Creating a Presentation Before you create a Presentation View, you must create a Presentation File. You store the Presentation in an *.ipn file. Default templates are available for Presentation files. Procedure
On the Standard toolbar, on the New fly-out menu, select Presentation.
Presentation Environment The Presentation Environment is similar to the part modeling and assembly environment. The Panel Bar contains the tools you use to create the Presentations; the graphics window displays the assembly geometry you use in the presentation views; and the browser displays view names and other information relevant to the Presentation environment.
Presentation Environment
Creating a Presentation View You use a Presentation View to create exploded views of the assembly. There is no limit to the number of presentation views you can create, but you can only reference one assembly in each Presentation file.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
375
Access Methods Use the following methods to access to Create View tool. Panel Bar
When you select the Create View tool, the Select Assembly dialog box is displayed.
Select Assembly Dialog Box
File: If you already have an assembly file open, it will be listed automatically in the File field. If you do not currently have an assembly file open, you will need to enter the path for the assembly or select the browse button to browse for the assembly file. Design View: Select the Design View to use as the basis for the Presentation View. Click the browse button to browse for a different design view file. Explosion Method: Select the explosion method from the following options. Manual: This option creates the Presentation View without exploding the assembly components. You explode the view later by adding tweaks to move each component. Automatic: This option creates the exploded view by automatically moving the components in the assembly based on the distance you enter in the Distance field. Only components with certain assembly constraints such as Mate, and Insert, will be moved automatically. Distance: Enter an explosion distance to move each component. This option is only available if you select Automatic. Create Trails: This option will create trails indicating the path of each component from its assembled position to the exploded position.
376
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
The image below represents a typical presentation containing two Presentation Views. Each Presentation View is displayed in the browser. You can expand it to display the assembly components. Other options are available for filtering the information presented in the browser. To activate a view, double-click on the view in the browser. The view names listed here are the same view names available to create a 2D drawing view later. If necessary you can rename the view by performing a slow double-click on the name in the browser.
Presentation View
Creating a Presentation View - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating a Presentation View. 1. 2.
Create a new Presentation file. On the Panel Bar, click the Create View tool. In the Select Assembly dialog box, enter or browse for the assembly file to use in the Presentation View. Accept the default Design View or select one from the drop-down list. To automatically explode the components, select the Automatic explosion method and enter a distance in the Distance field. To create trails on the components, click the Create Trails option, then click OK to create the Presentation View.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
377
378
3.
The Presentation View is created accordingly and appears in the Presentation Browser. Expand the view to see the components and tweaks automatically applied. If you need to edit the tweak, enter a new value in the Edit Box at the bottom of the browser.
4.
Continue to create presentation views as required.
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Creating Tweaks and Trails After you create the presentation view, you may need to add tweaks to the components to move them to new locations in the exploded view. Even if you have chosen the automatic explosion method, most exploded views will require manual tweaks. Procedure
When you tweak a component you can move and/or rotate the component in any direction. When the tweaks are created you also have the option of displaying the trails, which represent a path from the components current location after tweaks have been applied, to its assembled location. Trails help clarify how a component in an exploded view fits into the overall assembly.
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Tweak Components tool. Panel Bar
Keyboard Shortcut
T
Tweak Component Dialog Box
Direction: Click the Direction button to define the direction of the tweak. Select a face or edge on any component to display the Triad icon. The direction does not have to be defined from a feature on the part you tweak. Once the direction triad appears, you can select elements of the triad to control the transformation. The blue axis indicates the current transformation axis.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
379
You can switch the active direction by: •
Choosing another axis in the Tweak Component dialog box.
•
Selecting the axis on the Triad to make it current.
Components: Click the Components button to select the components to tweak. If you select a component by mistake, deselect it by holding down the CTL key and reselecting the component. Trail Origin: Click the Trail Origin button to select a different trail origin. Display Trails: Select this option to display trails showing the path of the tweak. Transformations: In the Tweak Component dialog box, in the Transformations area you can set the transformation options for the tweak. You can select the option to move or rotate the component. This option enables you to move the component along the selected axis. Clicking the X, Y, or Z here is the same as selecting each axis on the triad in the graphics window. This option enables you to rotate the component around the selected axis. Enter a distance or angle value for the tweak and click the green check mark button. You can use the value field for tranlational and rotational tweaks. Note: When you drag the tweak distance, start dragging the distance with the cursor away from existing components. Inadvertently selecting a point over a component will add that component to the tweak.
380
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Edit Existing Trail: Click the Edit Existing Trail button to edit an existing trail. You will select the trail then adjust the tweak value. Triad Only: Select this option to rotate the triad only. This option is only available when the rotational transformation is selected. By rotating the triad, you can tweak the component in different angles. In the same area, click the green check button to finish tweaking the triad. Clear: Click to clear the current tweak and continue adding tweaks. Close: Click to close the dialog box.
Creating Tweaks and Trails - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating tweaks and trails. 1. 2.
Create a Presentation View. On the Panel Bar, click the Tweak Components tool and select face or edge to define the tweak direction.
3.
Select the components to be included in the tweak.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
381
382
4.
Confirm the Transformation settings then click and drag in a blank area of the screen. Click Clear to apply the tweak and continue.
5.
Select a face or edge to define the direction.
6.
Select the components to include in the tweak, and confirm the transformation direction. Click and drag in a blank area of the graphics window and then click Clear to apply the tweak and continue.
7.
Repeat the steps above to continue tweaking components. When finished, click Close.
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Animating a Presentation View After you create the Presentation View, it is possible to animate the explosion sequence and visualize the components in the assembly moving into or out of their assembled position. You can record the animation to a standard AVI format for use on other computers. Procedure
There are several options available to animate the presentation view, some of which are beyond the scope of this course. In this lesson you will learn the basics for animating a Presentation View.
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Animate tool. Panel Bar
After you start the Animate tool, use the standard player controls to play, rewind, or pause. In the Animation dialog box, in the Motion area, click the Record button to record the animation to an standard AVI file. Expand the dialog box to examine the tweak sequence. By default the animation will play in the reverse order that you applied the tweaks. If you select items in the sequence list, you can use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the animation sequence of the selected tweak. When you tweak multiple components at the same time, they appear as a group in the sequence list. Select items in the list and use the Group and Ungroup buttons to move items in and out of sequence groups. All items in a sequence group are animated at the same time. After you play the animation, click Reset to reset the sequence back to the beginning.
Animation Dialog Box
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
383
Browser Sequence View Click the Filter button at the top of the browser and select Sequence View on the flyout menu. This will display the tweaks in the sequence order that will be played during the animation sequence. Using this view it is possible to drag and drop component tweaks from one sequence to another.
Browser Sequence View
384
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Exercise: Presentations In this exercise, you will create a new presentation file of an assembly. After creating the presentation, you will create an exploded view of the components and then animate that exploded view. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals, click Exercise: Presentations
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Assembly Exploded View
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
385
Challenge Exercise: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals Challenge Exercise: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals Print Exercise Reference
In this exercise, you will use the concepts and techniques learned in this chapter to create the assembly pictured in the image below.
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals, click Challenge Exercise: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Completed Assembly Challenge
386
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Chapter Summary Summary
You learned the following in this chapter: Summary
•
What constitutes an assembly model and the overall process used to create them.
•
The different approaches that can be used when creating assembly models and the environment and interface used as you create the assembly.
•
Perform several different assembly related operations using the assembly browser.
•
Activating components and controlling the appearance properties of the browser.
•
Resequencing and restructuring an assembly.
•
Creating Design Views to save custom views and display characteristics of the assembly.
•
Placing components in the assembly using the Place Component tool.
•
Potential outside sources of geometry not created with Autodesk Inventor.
•
Replacing existing components in the assembly, while understanding the potential effect on assembly constraints when doing so.
•
Creating new parts in the context of the assembly.
•
Using assembly based work features to constrain components and using parts consisting of only 2D geometry to validate design intent.
•
Projecting geometry from other parts in the assembly when creating new components.
•
Degrees of Freedom and how they effect each part in the assembly.
•
Simulating motion in an assembly by driving constraints and temporarily repositioning components in the assembly by using the Move Component and Rotate Component tools.
•
Placing assembly constraints on components in your assembly.
•
Alternative methods for placing constraints on components in the assembly.
•
Methods for creating adaptive features and sketches and how to control the adaptive status of these features.
•
Tips and considerations for using Adaptive parts in your assembly.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
387
388
Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals
Introduction to Drawings Chapter Introduction In this chapter you learn about... •
Creating and utilizing the available drafting standards to control several properties of your drawing.
In this chapter After completing this chapter, you will be able to... •
Create and utilize the available drafting standard to control properties of your drawing.
•
Creating and using text styles and dimension styles.
•
Using various drawing resources.
•
•
Creating base and projected views of your part or assembly files.
Create and use text styles and dimension styles.
•
•
Editing projected views and the options that are available.
Perform several functions involving drawing resources.
•
Creating and editing section views on your drawing.
•
Create base and projected views.
•
Creating detail views to magnify portions of your drawing view.
•
Create and edit section views.
•
Creating and editing auxiliary views on your sheet.
•
•
Creating and editing broken views.
Project isometric views from the section to create an isometric section view.
•
Creating and editing break out views as an alternative to standard section views.
•
Create and edit detail views.
•
Managing views and sections after they have been created.
•
Create and edit auxiliary views on your sheet.
•
Copying and/or moving views between sheets in the drawing.
•
Create and edit broken views on your sheet.
•
Retrieving model dimensions for use in the drawing.
•
Copy and/or move drawing views between sheets in the drawing.
•
Placing reference dimensions on the sheet.
•
•
Creating general types of annotation on your drawing.
Retrieve model dimensions for use in the drawing.
Setting Drafting Standards Overview Overview
Overview Autodesk Inventor software supports ANSI, BSI, DIN, GB, ISO, and JIS, drafting standards. You use them to control the appearance of drawing features such as Balloons, Weld Symbols, and Parts Lists. The default standard is determined by the option you select during installation and can be changed for each drawing. In this lesson you will learn how to use drafting standards to control the appearance of drawing features.
Drafting Standards and Styles
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to
390
•
Use Drafting Standards to control the appearance of drawing features
•
Create and use text styles in your drawing
•
Create and use dimension styles in your drawings
•
Create drawing templates
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Drafting Standards You use the Drafting Standards dialog box to control several different drawing feature properties. When you create a new drawing, the default drafting standard is determined by the options chosen during installation. You can create a new standard or modify an existing standard for the current drawing. When you create or modify drafting standards, the changes apply only to the current drawing. If you want the changes to be available to all new drawings, you must save the current drawing as template in your template directory. Principle
Default Drafting Standards The following list represents the available default drafting standards. You can use these standard as they are, modify them, or create a new standard based upon one of the default standards. •
ANSI
•
BSI
•
DIN
•
GB
•
ISO
•
JIS
Access Methods Use the following method to access the Drafting Standards dialog box. Pull Down Menu
Format > Drafting Standards
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
391
Drafting Standards Dialog Box Select the active drafting standard or click the Click to Add area to create new drafting standard based upon one of the existing standards. Click the [>>] button to expand the Drafting Standards dialog box. Several tabs, each containing different options for controlling properties stored within the drafting standard are available.
Drafting Standards Dialog Box
392
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Drafting Standard Properties Each tab in the Drafting Standards dialog box contains properties for drawing features that are stored within the drafting standard. •
Common Tab: This tab controls common drawing properties such as default text style, view projection, and line properties.
•
Sheet Tab: The options on this tab controls sheet specific properties such as labels and colors.
•
Terminator Tab: This tab controls the type and size of leader and dimension terminators.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
393
394
•
Dimension Style Tab: Select the active dimension style for the current standard. The characters must be selected to be available for dimensions. Unselected characters will not be available for dimensions.
•
Control Frame Tab: Use the options on this tab for Control Frame properties. Only the selected symbols will be available for GD&T features.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
•
Datum Target Tab: These options control Datum Target feature properties such as point size, linetypes, and units.
•
Parts List Tab: This tab controls Parts Lists properties such as Text Style, Heading, and Columns to be included.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
395
396
•
Balloon Tab: These options control properties for Balloon features such as Text Style, Balloon Type, and Offset Spacing.
•
Hatch Tab: These options set the default hatch pattern for section views. Only the selected Hatches will be available when you create new hatch areas or modify existing hatch patterns.
•
Center Mark Tab: These options control the center mark properties.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
•
Welding Symbols Tab: These options control weld symbol properties. Only the selected symbols will be available in the drawing.
•
Weld Bead Recovery Tab: This tab controls the weld bead properties for weld features.
•
Surface Texture Tab: These options control surface texture symbol properties. Only the selected symbols will be available when you place surface texture features.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
397
Creating a new Drafting Standard - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating a new drafting standard.
398
1. 2.
On the Format menu, click Drafting Standards. In the Drafting Standards dialog box, select the Click to add new standard area.
3.
In the New Standard dialog box, enter a name for your standard, and select the base standard from the drop-down list.
4.
The new drafting standard will be listed among the default drafting standards and should appear selected in the Current column. Continue to modify other properties as required. Click OK to close the Drafting Standards dialog box.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Text Styles You create and use text styles to control the appearance of text features for annotation objects in your drawings. Stored within the drawing, the default text style is set within the current drafting standard. If you modify or create new text styles, and you want them available in other drawings, you will need to save the current drawing containing the text style as a drawing template in your template directory. Concept
The image below represents the same text object with different text styles applied.
Different Text Styles
Default Text Styles Note
Within each drawing is a default text style for each drafting standard. These text styles are named DEFAULT-Standard Name and cannot be modified or deleted. If you select one of these text styles in the Text Styles dialog box, all options will be grayed out.
Access Methods Use the following methods to access Text Style related functions. Pull Down Menu
Text Styles
Standard Toolbar
Select to change the active text style, or apply a different text style to the selected text.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
399
Text Styles Dialog Box
You can adjust the following properties for all but the DEFAULT-Standard Name text styles. Standard: In the drop-down list, select the drafting standard to display text styles. Font: In the drop-down list, select the text font for the style. Size: In the drop-down list, select the size for the font, or enter a new value. Style Name: Enter a name for the text style. Format/Justification/Color: Select the options to control the format (Bold, Italic, Underline), Justification (Left, Center, Right, Top, Middle, Bottom) and color. %Stretch: Specifies the width of the text. Rotation: Click to set the default rotation of the text. 0, 270, 180, or 90 degrees. Line Spacing: In the drop-down list, select the line spacing for the text style. Value: Enter a line spacing value. Only available for the Exactly, or Multiply options.
400
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Applying a different text style - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for applying a different text style to an annotation object. 1.
Select an annotation object, then on the Standard toolbar, in the Style drop-down list, select the Text Style.
2.
The selected annotation object updates to reflect the changes in the text style.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
401
Dimension Styles You create and use dimension styles to control the appearance properties of dimension objects in the drawing. Each dimension contains a number of different properties that you can modify and save in a dimension style. The default dimension style is set in the current drafting standard and each drafting standard includes a number of predefined dimension styles. Concept
The following image shows several dimensions applied to the geometry using different dimension styles.
Dimension styles are stored within the drawing. In order to make your custom dimension styles available for other drawings, you must save the drawing as a template or use the drawing orgranizer to copy dimension styles from an existing drawing to the current one.
Access Methods Use the following methods to access dimension style functions.
402
Pull Down Menu
Format > Dimension Styles
Standard Toolbar
Select to set the active dimension style or change the dimension style of a selected dimension.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
The Dimension Styles dialog box contains several tabs, each with a unique set of properties that you can adjust. Select the dimension style to modify and adjust the properties as required.
Dimension Styles Dialog Box
Default Dimension Style Note
Dimension styles named DEFAULT-Standard Name exist for each drafting standard and cannot be modified. They can be used as the basis for new dimension styles by selecting the dimension style and clicking New.
Using Dimension Styles As you create dimensions in your drawing, the Style drop-down list reflects the current dimension style. Because the Style drop-down list is used for controlling other style related options, the dimension style is only displayed when one of the dimension tools is active.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
403
If you want to change the current dimension style, select a different style from the drop-down list. The selected style will become the current dimension style until it is changed.
As you place the dimension, it assumes the properties of the current dimension style.
Overriding Dimension Styles Dimension styles can be overridden by right-clicking on the dimension and then selecting Options or Tolerance on the shortcut menu.
When a setting being changed is common to one found in the Drafting Standards or the Dimension Style dialog boxes, the rule of thumb is:
404
•
Override settings supersede the Dimension Style settings.
•
Dimension Style settings supersede the Drafting Standard settings.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Dimension Overrides If you apply a dimension style to a dimension containing overrides, the overrides on that dimension will be lost. Note
Copying Dimension Styles The drawing organizer enables you to copy dimension styles from a source drawing to the current drawing. The drawing organizer works exactly like the organizer for materials, color styles and lighting but only contains options specific to the drawing environment.
To copy a dimension style, enter or browse for the path of the source drawing containing the dimension style. Select the dimension style(s) to copy and click the Copy button.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
405
Drawing Templates After you modify and create custom drafting standards, text styles, dimension styles, and other settings specific to your environment, you should save the drawing as a template. By saving the drawing as a template, you can create new drawings based on the template which will contain the custom settings created earlier. Procedure
The following list represents settings or properties that are saved within a drawing template. •
Drafting Standards
•
Dimension Styles
•
Text Styles
•
Sheet Formats
•
Borders
•
Title Blocks
•
Sketched Symbols
Access Method Use the following method to create a drawing template. Pull Down Menu
File > Save Copy As
Before you save your drawing file as a template, determine the location for your template files. The File Tab of the Options dialog box contains a field setting for the template location. Save your drawing in this location or a subfolder to make it available as a template when you create new drawings.
Options Dialog Box - Partial
406
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Exercise: Setting Drafting Standards In this exercise, you create a new drawing and define a new drafting standard, text style, and dimension style. You will then save the drawing as a template a create a new drawing using the new template. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings, click Exercise: Setting Drafting Standards
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Drafting Standards and Styles
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
407
Drawing Resources Overview Overview
Overview A typical Autodesk Inventor drawing contains several features that are not directly related to the 3D geometry they are used to represent. Features such as sheets, title blocks, borders, and views are all used to present information that meet typical drawing standards. In this lesson you learn how to utilize the various drawing resources available in a typical drawing environment.
Drawing Created Using Drawing Resources
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to
408
•
Edit the default sheet by changing its size, orientation and other options
•
Create drawings containing predefined views by using Sheet Formats
•
Create drawings containing multiple sheets
•
Create sheet formats to enable you to easily create drawings containing predefined views
•
Define a sheet border for use in future drawings
•
Create a custom title block for use in future drawings
•
Edit existing title blocks that are automatically placed on the drawing
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Editing the Default Sheet When you create a new drawing, it is created with one default sheet. Each sheet contains properties for size, orientation, and title block position that you can edit. Procedure
Access Method Use the following method to access the Edit Sheet tool. Shortcut Menu
Right-click on the sheet in the browser > Edit Sheet
Edit Sheet Dialog Box
The following options are available in the Edit Sheet dialog box. Name: Enter a sheet name or accept the default. Size: Select a predefined sheet size or select the custom size option in the drop-down list. Height: Available only when Custom is selected in the Size drop-down list, enter a height for the sheet. Width: Available only when Custom is selected in the Size drop-down list, enter a width for the sheet. Orientation: Select a title block position option and the orientation of the sheet Portrait or Landscape. Exclude from count: By default each sheet is counted and its number displayed in the title block. Selecting this option will exclude the current sheet from the count and thereby not counted in the title block area showing the sheet number. Exclude from printing: Selecting this option will exclude the current sheet from printing when you select the All Sheets option in the Print Drawing dialog box.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
409
Editing the Default Sheet - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for editing the default sheet.
410
1.
In the drawing browser, right-click on the sheet and click Edit Sheet on the shortcut menu.
2.
Adjust the options as required in the Edit Sheet dialog box and click OK.
3.
The sheet in the graphics window and browser updates to reflect the new information.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Using a Sheet Format for Sheet Layout Included in each new drawing, located under the drawing resources folder in the drawing browser, is a Sheet Formats folder. You can expand this folder to expose predefined sheet formats to automatically create pre-defined drawing views. Procedure
A sheet format is defined for common sheet sizes. Double-click on a sheet format to create a new sheet using the pre-defined sheet size and views. Each sheet format will consist of one view based upon a predefined orientation such as Front and other projected views. The view scale is set to 1 and may require editing after placement.
Access Methods Use the following method to access pre-defined sheet formats. Drawing Browser
Selecting the Component When you double-click on the sheet format, the Select Component dialog box will appear. In the drop-down list you can select from the list of currently open Autodesk Inventor files, or use the Browse button to browse for the file.
A new sheet is created with the predefined views of the selected file.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
411
Creating Multiple Sheets Although each new drawing is created with a single sheet, you are not limited to the amount of sheets that can be included in a single drawing. Procedure
When you create a new sheet in the drawing, depending on the method chosen to create the new sheet, you will either be presented with the New Sheet dialog box or the sheet size and properties will be duplicated from the current sheet. The latter result only occurs when creating a new sheet by right-clicking in the browser and selecting New Sheet on the shortcut menu. The image below represents multiple sheets in the browser. You can only view one sheet at a time. To activate a sheet, double-click on the sheet in the browser.
Access Methods Use the following methods to add new sheets to the drawing.
412
Pull Down Menu
Insert > Sheet
Drawing Browser
Right-click in a blank area and click New Sheet
Keyboard Shortcut
SHIFT + N
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
New Sheet Dialog Box
The following options are available in the New Sheet dialog box. Size: Select a predefined sheet size from the drop-down list, or click Custom to enter a custom sheet size. Height: Available only when Custom is selected in the Size drop-down list, enter a height for the sheet. Width: Available only when Custom is selected in the Size drop-down list, enter a width for the sheet. Orientation: Select the appropriate orientation option, either Portrait or Landscape.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
413
Creating Sheet Formats Each drawing contains predefined sheet formats that you can use to automatically create drawing views on a new sheet. You can also define custom sheet formats that represent sheet sizes and view positions that are common to your drawings. If the drawings you create utilize the same view configuration and sheet size, consider creating custom sheet formats. Procedure
Custom sheet formats are stored in the current drawing. Save the current drawing as a template to have access to the sheet formats later. Unlike Dimension Styles and Text Styles, sheet formats cannot be copied from another drawing using the Drawing Organizer. After you create the new sheet format, it will appear in the Sheet Formats folder in the drawing browser.
Access Methods Use the following method to access the Create Sheet Format tool. Drawing Browser
414
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Create Sheet Format Dialog Box
Name: Enter a sheet format name and click OK.
Creating Sheet Formats - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating sheet formats. 1.
Create a drawing containing the sheet size and views common to other drawings that you create.
2.
In the browser, right-click on the sheet and select Create Sheet Format dialog box.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
415
416
3.
Enter a descriptive name in the Create Sheet Format dialog box and click OK.
4.
Your custom sheet format will appear in the Sheet Formats folder in the browser. Double-click on the sheet format to use it to create new sheets.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Defining a Border Procedure
•
Each drawing you create will contain a Default Border item listed in the Borders folder in the drawing browser. The default border is used on all new sheets and can resize dynamically when the sheet size is changed.
•
You can define a custom border for use on your drawings. If you decide to create a custom border, consider these two items. • •
•
Custom borders do not resize automatically if the sheet size changes. When creating a new border, you should create a new sheet based upon the size the new border will be designed to fit. To define a new border, expand the Drawing Resources and right-click on the Borders folder and click Define New Border on the shortcut menu.
•
Use standard sketching tools to sketch the border geometry. After you create the border geometry, right-click in the graphics window and click Save Border on the shortcut menu.
•
Enter a name in the Border dialog box and click OK.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
417
•
To use the new border, double-click on it in the browser.
Inserting a Border When you create a new drawing, or add a new sheet to the existing drawing, it will automatically contain a border. To insert a different border, you must first delete the existing border from the sheet. After the border is deleted from the sheet, you can double-click on a border in the Borders folder or right-click on a border and click Insert Drawing Border.
418
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Defining a Title Block You can define custom title blocks for use in your drawings. Title blocks are stored within the current drawing, therefore you should save the file containing the drawing as a template in order to have access to the custom title block later. Procedure
To define a new title block, right-click on the Title Blocks folder and select Define New Border on the shortcut menu.
Use standard sketch tools to create the geometry and text features for the title block. You can include special text items such as Property fields or Prompted Entry fields in the title block. Property fields are automatically populated based up file properties such as Part Number, or Author, while Prompted Entry fields are populated by prompting you for the values to use in the dialog box. In the image below, the default title block definition displays standard sketch geometry and dimensions as well as different types of text, some static text while others are property fields. Text between < > indicates a non-static text entity.
After creating the geometry and text for the title block, right click in the graphics window and click Save Title Block on the shortcut menu. Enter a name for the new Title Block in the Title Block dialog box. The new title block will be displayed in the browser under the Title Blocks folder. Double-click on the title block to use it on the sheet.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
419
Inserting a Title Block When you create a new drawing, or add a new sheet to the existing drawing, it will automatically contain a title block. To insert a different title block, you must first delete the existing title block from the sheet. After the title block is deleted from the sheet, you can double-click on a title block in the Title Blocks folder or right-click on a Title Block and click Insert.
420
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Editing Title Blocks Each drawing template will contain at least one default title block that will be placed on each new sheet in the drawing. In most cases the default title block will only require minimal modifications to include information required by your company. Procedure
Like other drawing resource items, title blocks are stored in the current drawing so save the drawing as a template in order to have access to the revised title block at a later date.
Access Methods Use the following methods to edit a title block. Browser
Browser
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
421
When you add text elements to the title block, in order to include property fields or prompted entry items, use the Property Field tool on the Panel Bar. Selecting this tool will display a different version of the Format Text dialog box as shown below.
Format Field Text Dialog Box
Select the appropriate property type based upon the text element you are creating. For more information on these property types refer to the Autodesk Inventor software help system.
Editing Title Blocks - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for editing title blocks.
422
1.
In the browser, right-click on the title block and select Edit Definition on the shortcut menu.
2.
A new sheet containing the title block definition is displayed.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
3.
Add sketch geometry, text, and property fields as required.
4.
Right-click in the graphics window and click Save Title Block on the shortcut menu. Click Yes in the Save Edits dialog box.
5.
Changes to the title block definition are applied to the sheet and the title block definition in stored in drawing resources.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
423
Exercise: Drawing Resources In this exercise, you will use the features available in the drawing resources folder to perform common tasks in the drawing environment. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings, click Exercise: Drawing Resources
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Drawing Created Using Drawing Resources
424
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Projected Views Overview Overview
Overview After you complete the 3D design of your part or assembly, manufacturing will require dimensioned drawings in order to build your design. The first step in creating production drawings is to create the required orthographic and isometric views. In this lesson you learn how to create projected views of your part or assembly files.
Assembly Drawing with Projected Views
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to •
Create a base view
•
Create projected views from the base view
•
Edit orthographic views and understand how other projected views may be affected
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
425
Creating a Base View You create a base view to begin creating orthographic views. The base view establishes the original view orientation and scale where the latter projected views will be based. Procedure
When you create the base view, you specify the file to be used for the view, the view orientation, scale, and style. After you specify this information, the view is placed onto the sheet and an associative link between the drawing and the part, assembly, or presentation file is established. If the part geometry changes, those changes will reflect in the drawing. The image below is a base view of a part placed in the drawing.
Access Method Use the following method to access the Base View tool. Panel Bar
426
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Drawing View Dialog Box
File: Enter or browse for the file to create its view. If you have a part, assembly, or presentation file open, it will be the default file listed. If multiple files are open, you select them in the drop-down list. Orientation: Select the orientation for the base view. Move your cursor away from the dialog box to see a preview of the view before it is created. The standard view orientations are based upon the origin planes of the file you select. Change View Orientation: Select this icon to open the model's 3D viewing window. You use standard view tools to define a custom view orientation. Weldment: Available only when creating a view of an Autodesk Inventor weldment assembly. Design View: Available only when you create a view of an Autodesk Inventor assembly. You select the Design View to use for the initial view creation. •
Associative: When you create a view of an Assembly, this option makes the view associative to the design view. This option is not available for default.user design views.
Scale: Enter a scale or select a predefined scale on the flyout menu. Scale from Base: Not available when you create a base view. You use it when you edit projected views. Show Scale: This option displays the scale on the sheet under the view. Label: Enter a label for the view or accept the default view label. The view label is displayed in the drawing browser. Show Label: This option displays the view label on the sheet under the view. Style: Select the rendering style for the view: •
Hidden Line - Hidden lines are displayed.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
427
•
Hidden Line Removed - Hidden lines are removed.
•
Shaded - View is shaded using the same colors used in the assembly or part file
Creating a Base View - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating a base view in the drawing.
428
1. 2. 3.
Create a new drawing. On the Panel Bar, click the Base View tool. Enter or browse for the Autodesk Inventor file to create the view and adjust the options such as orientation, scale, and style. Left click on the sheet to place the view.
4.
The base view is placed on the sheet according to the options specified.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Creating Projected Views The Projected View tool enables you to create projected views from any existing view on the sheet. It presents no options or dialog box. Procedure
If you select the Projected View tool you must select the base view, then position each projected view. I you right-click on a view and select Create View > Projected, you drag the projected views to the desired position, then after the view positions have been placed, right-click, and select create on the shortcut menu. All view positions are previewed by a bounding box prior to the views being created. When you create projected views, the view orientation is automatically determined based upon its position on the sheet relative to the base view. If you place the projected view to the right of the base view, it will generate a right-side projection of the base view. If you place the projected view at an angle from the base view, it will generate an isometric view based upon the relative position from the base view. By default the following view properties are carried over from the base view: •
Scale
•
Style (Orthographic Only)
The following image represents a typical drawing with a base view and three projected views.
Drafting Standards Projection Setting Note
The description above is based upon a Third Angle projection setting in the Drafting Standards dialog box. First Angle projection method is also available.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
429
Panel Bar
Shortcut Menu
Create View > Projected
Creating Projected Views - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating projected views.
430
1.
On the Panel Bar, click the Projected View tool and select the base view.
2.
Move the cursor to the location of the projected view and left-click. A bounding box of the view will appear at the placement location.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
3.
Continue to select positions on the sheet for projected views.
4.
Right-click in the graphics window and click Create on the shortcut menu.
5.
The projected views are created based upon the positions selected on the sheet.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
431
Editing Projected Views After you create base and projected views, you can edit the view properties using the Drawing View dialog box. Depending on the type of view, Base or Projected, different options are available for editing. Procedure
When you edit a Base view, you can change the Scale and Style properties, however while editing a projected view, you can only change these properties if you clear the options Scale from Base and/or Style from Base. On a projected view, these properties are linked to the base view to ensure the same scale across views, and the same rendering style.
Access Methods Use the following method to edit views. Shortcut Menu
Right-click on a view and click Edit View.
Editing a Base View While you edit a base view, you can edit any option that is not greyed out. If you change the scale factor on the base view, all projected views with the Scale from Base option selected, will update to reflect the new scale factor.
Drawing View Dialog - Editing a Base View
432
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Editing a Projected View While you edit a projected view, you can edit any option that is not greyed out. Clear the check mark for the Scale from Base and Style from Base options to change the view scale or rendering style.
Drawing Dialog Box - Editing a Projected View
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
433
Exercise: Projected Views In this exercise, you will create a new drawing and place a base view and three projected views on the sheet. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings, click Exercise: Projected Views
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Assembly Drawing with Projected Views
434
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Section Views Overview Overview
Overview When you create drawings of parts and assemblies, important internal details are sometimes obscured by other features or parts. Section views enable you to better visualize these important details by removing the parts or features that are obstructing the view. Features that were obstructed or displayed as hidden lines, are drawn with continuous lines with hatch patterns representing the section plane. In this lesson you learn how to create section views of part and assembly drawings.
Completed Section Views
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to •
Create section views in the drawing
•
Create section views of the assembly in the drawing while controlling which parts are sectioned
•
Edit section views by modifying the section line and editing the hatch pattern
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
435
Creating Section Views You create section views with the Section View tool. In order to create a section view, you must have at least one view on the drawing on which the section line is drawn. After drawing the section line, you pick a side of the current view for the section view. The section view is generated based upon the direction of sight in relation to the view being sectioned. Procedure
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Section View tool. Panel Bar
Shortcut Menu
436
Create View > Section
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Section View Dialog Box
The following options are available in the Section View dialog box. Label: Enter a label for the section view. Visible: When selected the view label will be visible on the sheet. Scale: Enter a scale factor for the section view. Visible: When selected the scale factor will be visible on the sheet. Style: Select a rendering style for the view. •
Hidden Line
•
Hidden Line Removed
•
Shaded
Section Lines and Constraints When you draw the section line, 2D constraints are being inferred the same as when sketching in the 3D modeling environment. You can constrain the sketch line to elements within the drawing view such as centers, endpoints, and midpoints. Constraining the section line to elements in the drawing view assist you in accurate positioning of the section line, but can also make moving the section line later, more difficult. When creating the section line, you can hold the CTRL key down to prevent constraints from being inferred. This technique is the same used to prevent constraints from being inferred in the modeling environment.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
437
Follow the image sequence below to see the effect of constraints being inferred.
Isometric Section View Tip
438
You can use Projected View tool to project an isometric view from a section view the same way you would project a standard view.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Creating Section Views - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating section views. 1.
On the Panel Bar, click the Section View tool and select the view to be sectioned. A red border will highlight the view.
2.
Sketch the section line. Note: You can draw the section line in one or more directions.
3.
After drawing the section line, right-click in the graphics window and click Continue on the shortcut menu.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
439
440
4.
Drag the section view to one side of the view being sectioned. If necessary, adjust the section view options in the Section View dialog box and select a point on the screen to section the view.
5.
The section view is created.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Assembly Section Views When you create section views of assembly drawings, each part in the assembly section view will be hatched with different properties for visual clarity as the section plane passes through each part. You can also control which parts are sectioned. By default, parts from the standard parts library are not sectioned, however you can manually turn on sectioning for standard parts. Procedure
You create section views for assembly drawings using the same techniques as single part section views.
Controlling Component Sectioning When you create a section view of an assembly drawing view, you can control which components are sectioned by right-clicking on the view being sectioned and clicking Show Contents on the shortcut menu. This can be done in the graphics window or in the browser.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
441
This results in the assembly and parts being listed under the view in the browser. Parts appearing with a gray icon indicate that the parts visibility is currently turned off.
After the contents of the assembly are displayed in the drawing browser, right-clicking on the components will present options on the shortcut menu. To prevent a part from being sectioned, clear the check mark next to the Section option.
In order to prevent a component from being sectioned in the section view, you must turn off the section property on the view being sectioned, not the section view. Tip
442
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Editing Section Views After you create the section view, it can be edited a number of ways. Procedure
•
Right-click on the view and click Edit View on the shortcut menu. This will present the Drawing View dialog box enabling you to edit the view in the same way to would edit other projected views.
•
Edit the sketch used for the section line. This will present the Sketch Panel Bar, enabling you to edit the sketch geometry in the same way you would edit sketch geometry in the modeling environment. You can apply/remove constraints, modify the sketch geometry, apply dimensions to the sketch geometry.
•
Constraint Drag the section line. You can edit the section line by dragging elements of the section line to new positions. This can only be done on elements of the section line that are not constrained to drawing geometry.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
443
•
444
Editing the hatch pattern. Right click on a hatch pattern in the section view. This will present the Modify Hatch Pattern dialog box, enabling you to change the hatch pattern properties.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Exercise: Section Views In this exercise, you will create section views of the assembly. After creating the section view, you will turn off sectioning for some components and edit the section by moving the section line and changing the hatch pattern applied to some components. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings, click Exercise: Section Views
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Completed Section Views
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
445
Detail Views Overview Overview
Overview As you create 2D drawings for manufacturing, it may be necessary to magnify drawing areas to show small details, and apply dimensions that would otherwise be difficult to clearly show. When you create a detail view, you magnify an area of the drawing while creating an associative link between the original view and the detail view. If the geometry being magnified, changes in the original view, those changes also reflect in the detail view. In this lesson you learn to create detail views.
Drawing with Detail Views
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to
446
•
Create detail views to magnify areas of your drawing
•
Edit detail views
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Creating Detail Views You use the Detail View tool to create detail views of an existing view in the drawing. When you start the tool, you are prompted to select a view then select a start point of the fence. The start point of the fence is the center of the detail view. After you select the start point, you drag the cursor away from the start point which will preview the detail view circle. All geometry contained within the detail view circle will be included in the detail view. After you select the end point of the fence, you are prompted to select a location for the view. The detail view will be positioned on the sheet at the selected point and will be scaled and labeled according to the options specified in the Detail View dialog box. Procedure
The resulting view is associated with the main view and any changes effecting geometry within the detail view will be automatically reflected in the detail view. Although the view is scaled, just like other scaled views, when you place dimensions on geometry within the view, the dimensions will reflect the actual geometry size.
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Detail View tool. Panel Bar
Shortcut Menu
Create View > Detail
Detail View Dialog Box
The following options are available in the Detail View dialog box. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
447
Label: Enter a label for the detail view. Visible: When selected the view label will be visible on the sheet. Scale: Enter a scale factor for the detail view. Visible: When selected the scale factor will be visible on the sheet. Style: Select a rendering style for the view. •
Hidden Line
•
Hidden Line Removed
•
Shaded
Creating Detail Views - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating detail views.
448
1. 2.
With at least one view on the drawing, on the Panel Bar, click the Detail View tool. Select the view then select the center point of the detail view. In the Detail View dialog box, adjust the options as required, but do not click OK. Clicking OK will end the tool without creating the view.
3.
Drag the detail view fence outwards and select a point that will include all required geometry within the fence circle and left click to designate the end point of the
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
fence circle.
4.
Position the detail view as required and left-click to place the view.
5.
The detail view is created accordingly.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
449
Editing Detail Views You can edit detail views in the same way you would edit other types of views, rightclick on the detail view and click Edit View on the shortcut menu. The Drawing View dialog box is displayed, enabling you to change the scale, label, and style options. Procedure
You can also edit the detail view by editing the fence circle used to define the area of the detail view. If you select the detail view fence and label on the main view, grip points will appear as shown in the image below.
Selecting the center grip point will enable you to move the fence circle, while selecting a grip point on the circle will enable you to change the size of the fence circle and thereby effect the area included in the detail view. In the image below, the detail view has been moved to a different area as well as resized.
It is also possible to edit the location of the view label located on the detail view circle. Click and drag on the label to place it in a new location along the detail fence circle. Movement of the label is restricted to be along the diameter of the circle.
450
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Exercise: Detail Views In this exercise, you create and edit detail views. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings, click Exercise: Detail Views
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Drawing with Detail Views
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
451
Auxiliary Views Overview Overview
Overview When you create drawings of parts some features on the geometry are positioned in a way that they cannot be accurately represented based upon the standard planes of projection. Auxiliary views enable you to create additional views on the drawing that are projected at a perpendicular angle from the selected edge. This results in a view that is normal to the selected edge and therefore the features along that edge are represented correctly. In this lesson you learn to create auxiliary views.
Drawing Containing Rotated Auxiliary Views
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
452
•
Create auxiliary views
•
Edit and/or realign auxiliary views
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Creating Auxiliary Views Occasionally a situation may arise in the drawing in which some features cannot be accurately represented by the standard projection planes. This situation generally occurs when features on the part lie alone planes other than the standard XYZ planes on the part. When this occurs, creating 2D views of these features results in the features not being displayed at an angle normal to the face or feature. As a result of the feature orientation, you may not be able to clearly dimension and/or represent the features. Procedure
To resolve this situation, you can use the Auxiliary View tool to create drawing views that are projected and an angle that is perpendicular or parallel to the selected edge.
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Auxiliary View tool. Panel Bar
Shortcut Menu
Create View > Auxiliary
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
453
Auxiliary View Dialog Box
The following options are available in the Auxiliary View dialog. Label: Enter a label for the auxiliary view. Visible: When selected the view label will be visible on the sheet. Scale: Enter a scale factor for the auxiliary view. Visible: When selected the scale factor will be visible on the sheet. Style: Select a rendering style for the view. •
Hidden Line
•
Hidden Line Removed
•
Shaded
Creating Auxiliary Views - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating auxiliary views.
454
1.
With at least one view on the sheet, on the Panel Bar, click the Auxiliary View tool and select the view.
2.
The Auxiliary View dialog box appears. Adjust the options as required and select an edge in the view to base the auxiliary view on.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Note: By default, the scale value will be the same as the selected view.
3.
Drag the auxiliary view to the desired location and left-click to position the view.
4.
The auxiliary view is created accordingly.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
455
Editing Auxiliary Views After you create the auxiliary view it can be edited in different ways. Procedure
1.
You can right-click on the view and select Edit View to use the Drawing View dialog box to make changes to the view just as you would other projected views.
2. 3.
You can break the alignment of the view to position it differently on the sheet. You can right-click on the view and select Realign Auxiliary Views to reselect the edge used to define the auxiliary view direction. In this lesson you learn how to break the view alignment and realign the auxiliary view.
Breaking the Auxiliary View Alignment One drawback to creating auxiliary views is that by restricting the view placement to be perpendicular or parallel to the selected edge, finding a suitable placement on the sheet at these angles can sometimes be difficult. By breaking the alignment of the view, you are free to move the auxiliary view anywhere on the sheet. The following steps represent an overview for breaking the view alignment of an auxiliary view.
456
1.
Right-click on the auxiliary view and click Alignment > Break on the shortcut menu.
2.
You can now drag the auxiliary view to any location on the sheet. Note the appearance of the view direction lines with labels matching the view label.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Realigning the Auxiliary View It is possible to realign the auxiliary view by reselecting the edge originally used in defining the view direction. One benefit to using this method to realign the view is that dimensions and annotations associated with the view will move with the view as it is realigned. In most cases these dimensions and/or annotations will need to be repositioned. The following steps represent an overview for realigning an auxiliary view. 1.
Right-click on the auxiliary view and click Realign auxiliary views on the shortcut menu.
2.
Select a different edge for the auxiliary view alignment.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
457
458
3.
Drag the auxiliary view to its new position and left-click to place the view.
4.
Reposition and/or delete the dimension and annotations as required.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Exercise: Auxiliary Views In this exercise, you will create and edit auxiliary views on the drawing. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings, click Exercise: Auxiliary Views
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Drawing Containing Rotated Auxiliary Views
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
459
Broken Views Overview Overview
Overview You use Broken views to shorten the view of elongated objects. You can use broken views when areas of the view can be removed without sacrificing the display of part features. In this lesson you learn to create broken views.
Drawing Containing Broken Views
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to
460
•
Use the Broken View tool to shorten elongated views
•
Edit a broken view by moving the grip points defining the break
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Creating Broken Views You create broken views by creating a base or projected view. After you create the view to be broken, you use the Broken View tool to break the view. When you create a broken view, all parent or child views associated with the view being broken will also appear as broken views. If dimensions have been placed on the drawing, the dimension lines will appear with a break symbol indicating the dimension is attached to a broken view. The dimension value will always represent the actual length being dimensioned. Procedure
The image below represents a shift linkage rod displayed in a broken view format. Note the appearance of the break lines and the break symbol on the dimension.
Panel Bar
Shortcut Menu
Create View > Broken
Broken View Dialog Box
You can adjust the following options in the Broken View dialog box. Style: Select the break line style, Rectangular or Structural. Display: Use the Min./Max. slider to adjust the display scale of the break lines. Gap: Enter a value for the gap between break lines on the sheet.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
461
Symbols: Available only when the Structural style is selected, sets the number of structural break symbols along the break lines. Orientation: Click the desired orientation, vertical or horizontal.
Creating Broken Views - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating broken views.
462
1.
With at least one view on the sheet, on the Panel Bar, click the Broken View tool. Adjust the options in the Broken View dialog box as required. Do NOT click OK.
2.
With the Broken View dialog box still open, select the first and second break points. The area between these two points will be removed from the view.
3.
The view is broken and the area removed.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Editing Broken Views After you create the broken view you can edit it like other views. You use the Edit View tool to change properties such as Scale, Labels, and Style. You can also edit the broken view using methods specific to broken views. Procedure
When you create a broken view, the break lines can be selected and will appear with a grip point at the center of the view as shown here.
Click and drag on the grip point to move the break to a new location.
You can also resize the break by clicking and dragging on the break lines. This has the effect of increasing or decreasing the area being removed by the break.
To decrease the effective area of the view, drag one break line over to the other side of the opposite break line.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
463
Exercise: Broken Views In this exercise, you create and edit broken views of the shifter linkage part. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings, click Exercise: Broken Views
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Drawing Containing Broken Views
464
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Break Out Views Overview Overview
Overview Sometimes section views remove too much information, or prevent important features on the outside of the part from being ideally represented. Break Out views can help to alleviate this problem by limiting the section view to an area encompassed by a sketch boundary and sectioned to a specified depth. When you create a break out view, you are cutting a window into the part or assembly to view features and/or parts that are obstructed by geometry. In this lesson you learn to create and edit break out views.
Drawing Containing Break Out Views
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to •
Create break out views to show internal part features
•
Use different methods to edit a break out view
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
465
Creating Break Out Views Before you create a break out view you must sketch a closed profile representing the area to be cut from the view. You can create sketches in the drawing the same way you create sketches in the modeling environment. But in the drawing environment you can place your sketch on the sheet, or attach it to a drawing view. Procedure
To create break out views, the sketch must be attached to the drawing view. To do this you select the drawing view prior to selecting the Sketch tool on the Standard toolbar. There are two methods for selecting the view prior to creating the sketch, •
Select the view on the sheet.
•
Select the view in the drawing browser.
When you select the view it will appear with a green bounding box.
As an indication that the sketch is attached to the view, it will appear nested under the view in the browser.
466
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
After you create the sketch you create a closed profile representing the area to be broken out from the view. Use standard sketching tools such as Lines, Splines, and Circles to create the closed profile. After you create the close profile, on the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit the sketch.
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Break Out View tool. Panel Bar
Shortcut Menu
Create View > Break Out
Break Out View Dialog Box
The following options are available on the Break Out View dialog box. Boundary: Select the sketch to use as the boundary for the break out view. If only one closed profile exists, it will be automatically selected. Depth: Select the following options in the drop-down list. From Point: Select a point to set the depth of the break out view. You can select a point in the current view or an adjacent projected or parent view. Optionally, enter an offset value from the selected point.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
467
To Sketch: Select a sketch line in an adjacent view to set the break out view depth. To Hole: Select a hole in the current or adjacent view to set the break out view depth. Through Part: When you create a break out view on an assembly, this option will break though the part in the area enclosed by the boundary. Show Hidden Edges: Temporarily displays hidden lines on a view in which they are not shown. This enables you to select geometry that is hidden to set the view depth.
Isometric Break Out View You can project an isometric view of a break out view in the same way you project other isometric views. Tip
468
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Editing Break Out Views After you create the break out view, aside from the standard Edit View option on the shortcut menu, you can edit the break out view using two additional methods that are unique to break out views. Procedure
Edit Definition: Right-click on the Break Out View in the browser and click Edit Definition on the shortcut menu. This will display the Break Out View dialog box enabling you to redefine how the view is created.
Edit Sketch: In the browser, right-click on the sketch used for the boundary to edit the sketch geometry.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
469
Exercise: Break Out Views In this exercise, you create a break out view of the part and then project an isometric view of the break out view. After creating the views, you will edit the break out view. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings, click Exercise: Break Out Views
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Drawing Containing Break Out Views
470
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Managing Views and Sections Overview Overview
Overview As you create drawing it is often difficult to know exactly how many sheets will be required and exactly what the best position of the views will be. As you begin to apply dimensions and other annotations to the drawing, often times the views need to be moved, in some cases copied as well as deleted. It is important you become proficient with managing your drawing views. In this lesson you learn to manage drawing views and sections.
Drawing Containing Typical Views
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to •
Use the different methods available to align drawing views
•
Delete a drawing view from the sheet
•
Copy a view from one sheet to another
•
Move views in the drawing from one sheet to another
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
471
Aligning Views As you create drawing views they automatically align to the parent view from which they were projected, but there may be times when you need to change the alignment of drawing views to make better use of the available area on the sheet. Procedure
There are four options related to aligning drawing views. •
Horizontal - Aligns views horizontally.
•
Vertical - Aligns views vertically.
•
In Position - Aligns views In Position.
•
Break - Breaks the alignment between views, enabling you to move the view in any direction.
Aligning Views Horizontally
472
1.
The Horizontal alignment option will align the selected view horizontally with another view on the sheet. In the following example the alignment between the two views has been broken. To realign the two views horizontally, right-click on the view to be aligned and click Alignment > Horizontal on the shortcut menu.
2.
Click the parent view for the alignment.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
3.
The horizontal view alignment is established.
Aligning Views Vertically 1.
The Vertical alignment option will align the selected view vertically with another view on the sheet. In the following example the alignment between the two views has been broken. To realign the two views vertically, right-click on the view to be aligned and click Alignment > Vertical on the shortcut menu.
2.
Click the parent view for the alignment.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
473
3.
The vertical view alignment is established.
In Position Alignment 1.
474
The In Position alignment option will align the selected view based upon an axis that is neither vertical or horizontal. In the following example the alignment between the two views has been broken. To realign the two views in position, right-click on the view to be aligned and click Alignment > In Position on the shortcut menu.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
2.
Click the parent view for the alignment.
3.
The In Position view alignment is established.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
475
Deleting a View You can delete views from the sheet by right-clicking on View on the sheet or in the browser, and clicking Delete on the shortcut menu. Procedure
If you select a parent view for deletion, you will be prompted to confirm the deletion of any existing dependent views. Expand the Delete View dialog box and click the Yes/ No field in the Delete column.
476
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Copy Views between Sheets You can copy a view from one sheet to another by right-clicking on the view and clicking Copy on the shortcut menu. Procedure
Double-click on the destination sheet and right-click on the sheet and click Paste on the shortcut menu.
The view is copied onto the other sheet and appears in the browser with a new view name.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
477
Moving Views between Sheets You can move a view from one sheet to another by dragging the view in the drawing browser. Procedure
1.
In the browser, click and drag on the view being moved to the destination sheet. Look for the position indicator showing the position of the view in the browser.
2.
The destination sheet is automatically activated. The selected view and all associated annotation is moved to the destination sheet. Note the change in appearance of the moved view in the browser.
Parent or dependent views of the moved view appear with shortcut icons with each view name indicating the sheet on which they are placed. You can right-click on the views with shortcut icons and click Go To on the shortcut menu, to activate the sheet of the selected view.
478
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Exercise: Managing Views and Sections In this exercise, you will manage the drawing views by aligning, deleting, copying and moving views. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings, click Exercise: Managing Views and Sections
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Drawing Containing Typical Views
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
479
Dimensioning a Drawing View Overview Overview
Overview A requirement common to all drawings are dimensions. After you place the drawing views, one of the first things you will do is begin to place the dimensions required to manufacture the part. There are several different ways to place dimensions on the drawing. In this lesson you learn how to utilize model dimensions in the drawing and how to place general dimensions.
Drawing Containing Dimensions
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to
480
•
Retrieve model dimensions for use in the drawing and understand the effect of editing these dimensions in the drawing
•
Place dimensions on the drawing using different dimensioning tools
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Retrieving Model Dimensions When you create your 3D model, you place parametric dimensions on sketches and features. When possible, you should utilize these dimensions on the drawing. Procedure
The Retrieve Dimensions tool enables you to retrieve dimensions from the model for use in the drawing. When you start the tool, you can select the dimensions that you want to retrieve while leaving others off. You can do this on both part and assembly drawing views. When you retrieve model dimensions, you select a view for the dimensions. You can only retrieve those dimensions that were created on the same plane as the selected view.
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Retrieve Dimensions tool. Panel Bar
Shortcut Menu
Right-click on a view and select > Retrieve Dimensions
Retrieve Dimensions Dialog Box
The following options are available on the Retrieve Dimensions dialog box. Select View: Select the view to retrieve the model dimension into. Only required when you start the Retrieve Dimensions tool from the Panel Bar. Select Source: Select Features: Select this option to retrieve dimensions from selected features. Select Parts: Select this option to retrieve dimensions from the entire part. Select Dimensions: Select the dimensions in the drawing view to retrieve. Only those dimensions that are selected will be retrieved.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
481
Retrieving Model Dimension - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for retrieving model dimensions into the view.
482
1.
On the Drawing Annotation Panel Bar, click the Retrieve Dimension tool and select the view to retrieve dimensions into.
2.
Select the Part or Features to retrieve dimensions from.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
3.
Click the Select Dimensions button and select the dimensions in the graphics window to retrieve. Only those dimensions that are selected here will be retrieved and placed in the view.
4.
Click OK to retrieve the dimensions and close the dialog box.
Editing Model Dimensions After retrieving the model dimensions you may be required to edit the dimension's position. Click and drag on the dimension value to adjust the dimensions position. The image below shows the dimensions in the positions in which they were retrieved.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
483
Represented below is the same area of the drawing after dragging the dimensions to new locations.
Changing Model Dimension Values If enabled during installation, you have the option of editing model dimensions while in the drawing environment. Right-click on a model dimension in the drawing and select Edit Model Dimension on the shortcut menu. This will present the same Edit Dimension dialog box as presented in the modeling environment.
Editing a hole dimension will present the following dialog box.
Options available in the Hole Dimensions dialog box are based upon the options used when creating the hole feature.
484
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
After changing the dimension value, the geometry will update and the new value is reflected in the retrieved dimension.
Proceed with Caution! Note
When you edit model dimensions in the drawing, it is important to clarify that you are indeed changing the parametric dimension of the model. Changing the dimension in the drawing environment will have the same effect as changing the dimension in the modeling environment. Constraints will be re-evaluated and the geometry will update in the 3D model and drawing to reflect the new value.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
485
Placing Dimensions You place dimensions on the drawing using the same tool you use in the modeling environment. When you place dimensions in the drawing, the dimensions are nonparametric and do not control geometry size as in the modeling environment. These dimensions are associative and will update to reflect correct values if changes occur on the geometry where they were applied. Procedure
You use the same dimension tool for all types of general dimensions, horizontal, vertical, diameter, radius, and aligned. Autodesk Inventor will place the correct type of dimension based upon the geometry selected.
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the General Dimension tool. Panel Bar
Keyboard Shortcut
D
Placing Dimensions - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview to placing different types of dimensions in the drawing environment.
486
1.
To place a linear type dimension, on the Panel Bar, click the General Dimension and select a line or point being dimensioned.
2.
Place the dimension or select another line or point to dimension to.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
3.
Place the dimension on the sheet. When the dimension preview is dotted, you are currently at the default offset spacing for the dimension. Use this dotted preview to space your dimensions uniformly on the sheet.
4.
To place a radial or diameter dimension, select a circular feature.
5.
Position the dimension on the sheet.
6.
To change the dimension type, before placing the dimension, right-click and select Dimension Type > Click Type of Dimension.
7.
To dimension to an apparent intersection, select a linear element, then right-click
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
487
and select Intersection on the shortcut menu.
8.
Select the next linear element to calculate the apparent intersection.
9.
Select the endpoint or another element to end the dimension.
10. Place the dimension on the sheet. Extension lines to the apparent intersection are
488
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
automatically added.
Editing Dimension Text When you place dimensions on the drawing, you can edit the text to add text to the dimension. Right-click on the dimension and click Text on the shortcut menu. This will present the Format Text dialog box.
The dimension value is indicated by <<>> characters and cannot be deleted. User placed text can be entered before or after the dimension value placeholder.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
489
Exercise: Dimensioning a Drawing View In this exercise, you will retrieve model dimensions into the drawing and use the General Dimension tool to add dimensions to different views. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings, click Exercise: Dimensioning a Drawing View
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Drawing Containing Dimensions
490
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
General Annotation Placement Overview Overview
Overview Annotating a typical drawing generally consists of more than just adding dimensions to features. When documenting an assembly, you will typically have other annotation requirements such as parts lists and balloons. In this lesson you learn to use additional annotation tools such as part lists and balloons when documenting your assembly.
Drawing Containing Typical Annotation Elements
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to •
Use hole tables to annotate holes
•
Annotate centerlines and centermarks using both manual and automatic methods
•
Create note and leader based annotation to the drawing
•
Add a parts list to the drawing to further annotate the assembly
•
Add balloons to parts in the assembly drawing
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
491
Annotating Holes Aside from standard dimensions to annotate hole placement, you can also use Hole Tables to annotate the location and size of holes in a drawing view. Procedure
Three different versions of the Hole Table tool are available: •
Hole Table - Selection - Creates a Hole Table based upon the holes you select.
•
Hole Table - View - Creates a Hole Table based upon all holes in the view.
•
Hole Table - Selected Type - Creates a Hole Table of only those holes that are identical to the selected hole.
Although the use of each of these tools will result in a Hole Table, each version of the tool enables you to select the holes to include using a different method. The image below represents an example of a drawing view containing a series of holes, accompanied by a typical hole table. When you place a hole table on your drawing, there are three main elements: (a) Hole Tags, which are placed next to each hole, (b) the Hole Table containing a row for each hole including the Hole Tag, Hole Position, and Size of each hole, and (c) the Origin Indicator which identifies the 0,0 location from which the hole locations are measured.
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Hole Table tools. Panel Bar
492
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Hole Table - Selection Tool - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating a hole table using the Hole Table - Selection tool. 1. 2.
On the Panel Bar, click the Hole Table - Selection tool and select the view containing the holes to include in the table. Position the origin indicator within the view allowing a coincident constraint to be inferred.
3.
Select the holes to include in the table. You can select the holes individually or by dragging a selection window around the holes to include.
4.
Right-click in the graphics window and click Create. Then position the hole table on the sheet.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
493
5.
The Hole Table and Tags appear on the drawing.
Hole Table - View Tool - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating a hole table with the Hole Table - View tool. 1. 2.
3.
494
On the Panel Bar, click the Hole Table - View tool and select the view containing the holes to include in the table. Position the origin indicator within the view allowing a coincident constraint to be inferred.
Position the Hole Table on the sheet. It is not necessary to select the holes as all holes in the view will be included in the Hole Table.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
4.
The Hole Table and Tags appear on the sheet.
Hole Table - Selected Type - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating a hole table using the Hole Table - Selected Type tool. 1. 2.
On the Panel Bar, click the Hole Table - Selected Type tool and select the view containing the holes to be included in the hole table. Position the origin indicator within the view allowing a coincident constraint to be inferred.
3.
Select one hole of each type you want to include in the hole table.
4.
Right-click and select Create on the shortcut menu, then position the hole table on
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
495
the sheet.
5.
Only the holes matching the type of hole selected are included in the hole table.
Editing Hole Tables After you create the hole table, you can edit the table in a number of different ways. Right-click on the hole table to reveal several different options to edit the appearance and information contained within the table. To split the hole table, right-click on the row you would like to split and click Table > Split
496
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
The table is split into two and can be moved to a different location.
To add or remove holes from the table, right-click on the hole table and click Row > Add or Remove. Selecting Add will enable you to select another hole previously not included in the table and add it to the list. Selecting Remove will remove the hole in the selected row from the Hole Table.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
497
You can control the visibility of hole table elements by right-clicking on the hole table and selecting Visibility > •
Origin - Controls the visibility of the origin indicator
•
Tag - Controls the visibility of the selected tag.
•
Hide All Tags - Hides all Tags
•
Show All Tags - Shows all Tags
Right-click on the hole table and select Edit >
498
•
Edit Tag - Enables you to edit the text used for the hole tag. The tag will change in the table and in the drawing view.
•
Options - Presents the Edit Hole Table dialog box. See below for more information.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Edit Hole Table Dialog Box
The following options are available in the Edit Hole Table dialog box. Title Position: Select a title position of Top, Bottom, or None. Line Weight: Enter line weights and colors for the table. Select the inside or outside button to set properties for each. Combine Notes: This option combines the notes cells for identical holes. Numbering: This option replaces the alphanumeric tags with sequential hole numbers. Rollup: This option combines the hole's table rows of the same type in the hole table. Only the first hole of each hole type is listed in the table. Available Properties: Select the available properties to include in the list by selecting the property and clicking the Add button. Delete: Select to delete a custom column. You cannot delete a default column New Field: Select to create a custom column that you can use to add data to the hole table. Selected Properties: Lists the currently selected properties appearing as columns in the table. Remove properties by selecting the property in the Selected Properties list and clicking Remove. Move Up/Move Down: Adjust the order of the selected properties. The position in the list represents the order of columns in the table left to right.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
499
Annotating Centerlines and Center Marks Several tools are available to annotate your drawing with centerlines and centermarks. You can place these annotations manually using the different tools available or place them automatically using the Automated Centerline tool. Procedure
Access Methods Use the following methods to access centerline and centermark tools. Panel Bar
Shortcut Menu
Right-click on a view and select Automated Centerlines
Placing Centerlines and Center Marks Automatically You can place centerlines and centermarks automatically in a view by using the Automated Centerline tool. Right-click on a view and select Automated Centerlines from the shortcut menu. The Centerline Settings dialog box enables you to set various criteria for the automated centerlines. Only the features matching the type(s) selected and meeting the threshold settings will receive automatic centerlines.
500
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Centerline Settings
Apply To: Select the types of features you would like to automatically apply centerlines or centermarks Projection: Select the view projection. Threshold: •
Fillet: Set the minimum and maximum thresholds for fillets to receive automatic centerlines.
•
Circular Edges: Set the minimum and maximum thresholds for circular edges to receive automatic centerlines.
•
Precision: Set the precision to be used when analyzing the features against the threshold values.
Note: These settings can also be set in the Document Settings for the drawing. On the Tools menu, click Document Settings, then click the Drawing Tab and select the Automated Centerline Settings button. Setting these options in the Document Settings will store the settings in the drawing or template, alleviating the task of having to set these options each time.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
501
Creating Automatic Centerlines - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for applying centerlines automatically to a drawing view.
502
1.
Right-click on the drawing view and click Automated Centerlines.
2.
Adjust the feature type and threshold options and click OK.
3.
The automatic centerlines are applied to features matching the selected type and threshold settings.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Using the Center Mark Tool - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using the Center Mark tool. 1. 2.
On the Panel Bar, click the Center Mark tool. Select a circular shape or feature.
3.
The center mark is added to the drawing view.
4.
Continue selecting circular features or right-click and select Done.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
503
Using the Centerline Tool - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using the Centerline tool to add centerlines to your drawing view.
504
1.
On the Panel Bar, click the Centerline tool and select an edge. The midpoint of the edge is automatically calculated.
2.
Select the next edge for the centerline to pass through. Again the midpoint of the edge is automatically calculated.
3.
Right-click in the graphics window and click Create on the shortcut menu. Then centerline is created passing through the midpoint of each selected edge.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Using the Centerline Bisector Tool - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using the Centerline Bisector tool to add centerlines to your drawing views. 1.
On the Panel Bar, click the Centerline Bisector tool and select the first edge to bisect.
2.
Select the second edge.
3.
The centerline is calculated and drawn by bisecting the angle of the two edges selected.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
505
Using the Centered Pattern Tool - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using the Centered Pattern tool to place centerlines on your drawing view.
506
1. 2.
On the Panel Bar, click the Centered Pattern tool. Click the location representing the center of the pattern.
3.
Select the features of the pattern. As soon as you select two features, the circular centerline will appear.
4.
Continue selecting features as required, then right-click and select Create on the shortcut menu.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Notes and Leaders You use the Text and Leader Text tools to add notes and leaders to the drawing views. While you use the Text tool to place paragraph style text on the sheet, the Leader Text tool attaches a leader with text to the geometry within the view. The leaders are associative to the view and will move if the view moves. Procedure
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Text and Leader Text tools. Panel Bar
Panel Bar
Common to both the Text and Leader Text tools, use the Format Text dialog box to add text to your drawing.
Format Text Dialog Box
The following options are available in the Format Text dialog box. Style: Select a text style for the text or accept the default text style listed. Text Format: Adjust the text formatting options such as justification, color, and width as required. Component: Optional - Select the component to be used for parameters.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
507
Source: Optional - Select Model Parameters or User Parameters. Parameter: Optional - Select the parameter to use in the text. Precision: Optional - Enter a precision for the parameter value. d0 Button: Optional - Click to add the selected parameter to the text window. Text Font: Select a font from the drop-down list. Height: Enter or select a text height. If you enter a text height once, it will be available in the list for future text in this drawing. Symbols Flyout: Select a special symbol to insert into the text.
Adding Text - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for adding text to the drawing. 1.
On the Panel Bar, click the Text tool and click and drag the rectangle text boundary.
2.
In the Format Text dialog box, enter the text, adjust options as required and click OK.
Adding Leader Text - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for adding leader text to your drawing.
508
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
1.
On the Panel Bar, click the Leader Text tool then select a start point and second point for the leader.
2.
Right-click in the graphics window and click Continue on the shortcut menu.
3.
Enter the text for the leader and click OK.
4.
The leader text is attached to the drawing geometry.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
509
Editing Text Right-click on a text object to access text editing options.
Text Shortcut Menu
Edit Text: Displays the Format Text dialog box. Rotate 90 CW: Rotates the selected text 90 degrees clockwise. Rotate 90 CCW: Rotates the selected text 90 degrees counter clockwise.
Editing Leader Text Right-click on a leader text object to access the text editing options.
Leader Text Shortcut Menu Options
Edit Leader Text: Displays the Format Text dialog box. Edit Arrowhead: Displays the Change Arrowhead dialog box. In the drop-down list, select a different arrowhead. Add Vertex / Leader: Select to add a vertex to the leader. Delete Leader: Select this option to delete the leader.
510
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Parts Lists You use Parts lists to annotate an assembly drawing by creating a table of parts included in the drawing. When you create a parts list you must first select a view. The parts list is based upon components in the selected view. Procedure
Access Methods Using the following method to access the Parts List tool. Panel Bar
The first time you create a parts list or balloon on the drawing you are presented with the Parts List - Item Numbering dialog box. The options in this dialog box enable you to control which components appear in the Parts List and how they are numbered. The options you choose apply to all parts lists and balloons in the drawing. The options in this dialog box are only set once in the current drawing, unless all balloons and parts lists are deleted.
Parts List - Item Numbering Dialog Box
The following options are available and can be edited. First-Level Components: This option numbers all first-level parts and subassemblies. You can display parts residing within a subassembly in the parts list and their numbers will be prefixed with the number of the item number of the subassembly. For example, if a subassembly in the parts list has an item number of 2, the parts residing within the parts list will be numbered 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3. Only Parts: This option numbers all first-level parts and parts within subassemblies, using standard item numbers. Subassemblies will not be listed or numbered in the parts list table. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
511
All: When selected, all parts in the assembly are numbered and listed. Not applicable or available when ballooning. Items: Only available when the Only Parts level option is chosen, enter a range of parts to include in the parts list. Valid syntax is as follows: Not applicable or available when ballooning. •
Entering 1-4,6,8,10 - would list items 1-4 and items 6, 8, and 10 in the assembly.
Table Wrapping: The following section is not available when ballooning. Number of Sections: Enter the number of sections to wrap the table. For example, if you enter 2, a 10 part list will be wrapped into two columns with 5 rows each. Direction to Wrap Table: Select the direction to wrap the table, left or right.
Creating a Parts List - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for adding a parts list to your drawing.
512
1.
On the Panel Bar, click the Parts List tool and select a drawing view.
2.
Adjust the options in the Parts-List - Item Numbering dialog box as required and click OK.
3.
Left-click to position the parts list on the drawing.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
4.
The parts list appears on the drawing.
Editing Parts Lists After you create the parts list you can edit it to add/remove columns, merge rows, expand the display of subassemblies, and change other properties that control the display and content of the parts list. To edit a parts list, right-click on the parts list and select Edit Parts List on the shortcut menu.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
513
The Edit Parts List dialog box enables you to modify several different properties of the parts list. For more information on editing a parts list, refer to the Autodesk Inventor Help system.
Edit Parts List Dialog Box
To add a column to the parts list, click the Column Chooser button. This will display the Parts List Column Chooser dialog box. Select from the available properties and click the ADD button to add the property to the selected property list.
Click OK to exit each dialog box. The new column will appear in the parts list on the drawing.
514
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Updating the Parts List If changes occur in the assembly model being referenced by the parts list, the parts list may not automatically update. If the parts list requires an update, it is indicated by a red lightning bolt next to the parts list in the drawing browser. Right-click on the parts list in the browser or graphics window and click Update on the shortcut menu.
Note: Updating the parts list will remove any information manually input into the parts list columns or cells that have not been frozen. To protect a cell from being overwritten, in the Edit Parts List dialog box, right-click on the cell and select Freeze Value on the shortcut menu.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
515
Placing Balloons You place balloons on assembly drawings to identify parts in the drawing and relate them to rows in the parts list. When you place a balloon on a part, the item number of the part will appear in the balloon. This item number is the same item number used in the parts list. Procedure
Balloons and parts lists are associative. If an item number in the parts list changes, the change will also be reflected in the balloon. This associativity is unidirectional only. If you override the item number in the balloon, the new value is not reflected in the parts list.
Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Balloon and Balloon All tools. Panel Bar
Keyboard Shortcut
B
The first time you create a parts list or balloon on the drawing you are presented with the Parts List - Item Numbering dialog box. The options in this dialog box enable you to control which components appear in the Parts List and how they are numbered. The options you choose apply to all parts lists and balloons in the drawing. The options in this dialog box are only set once in the current drawing, unless all balloons and parts lists are deleted.
516
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Parts List - Item Numbering Dialog Box
The following options are available and can be edited. First-Level Components: This option numbers all first-level parts and subassemblies. You can display parts residing within a subassembly in the parts list and their numbers will be prefixed with the number of the item number of the subassembly. For example, if a subassembly in the parts list has an item number of 2, the parts residing within the parts list will be numbered 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3. Only Parts: This option numbers all first-level parts and parts within subassemblies, using standard item numbers. Subassemblies will not be listed or numbered in the parts list table. All: When selected, all parts in the assembly are numbered and listed. Not applicable or available when ballooning. Items: Only available when the Only Parts level option is chosen, enter a range of parts to include in the parts list. Valid syntax is as follows: Not applicable or available when ballooning. •
Entering 1-4,6,8,10 - would list items 1-4 and items 6, 8, and 10 in the assembly.
Table Wrapping: The following section is not available when ballooning. Number of Sections: Enter the number of sections to wrap the table. For example, if you enter 2, a 10 part list will be wrapped into two columns with 5 rows each. Direction to Wrap Table: Select the direction to wrap the table, left or right.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
517
Placing Individual Balloons - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for placing individual balloons on your drawing.
518
1.
On the Panel Bar, click the Balloon tool and select a component in the drawing view. If this is the first balloon, and there is no parts list in the drawing, the Parts List - Item Numbering dialog box will appear. Adjust the options as required and click OK.
2.
Left-click to position the balloon then, right-click and select Continue on the shortcut menu.
3.
Continue selecting component and placing balloons as required. Right-click in the graphics window and click Done when completed.
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Placing Balloons Using the Balloon All Tool - Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using the Balloon All tool to balloon all components in the drawing view at once. 1.
On the Panel Bar, click the Balloon All tool and select a drawing view. If there is no parts list in the drawing, the Parts List - Item Numbering dialog box will appear. Adjust the options as required and click OK.
2.
The balloons are automatically applied to the assembly components. Note: Balloons are only placed on the first occurrence of each part. You will also have to manually adjust the position of the balloons.
3.
Click and drag on each balloon to reposition them as required.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
519
Editing Balloons After you place the balloons on the sheet, you can edit them by right-clicking on the balloon and selecting Edit Balloon on the shortcut menu.
The Edit Balloon dialog box enables you to change the balloon type, as well as override the balloon value. Note: If you override the balloon value, the new value is not reflected in the Parts List.
Balloon Type: Clear this option in order to select a different balloon type. Symbols: If your drawing contains sketched symbols, you can select a sketched symbol to use for the balloon. Balloon Value: Enter an override value in the override column. To use the override value, select the cell and click OK Click the Item cell to use the original item number in the balloon.
520
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Exercise: General Annotation Placement In this exercise, you open the drawing file and use the tools learned in this lesson to annotate the drawing with centerlines, notes, leaders, parts lists and balloons. Print Exercise Reference
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings, click Exercise: General Annotation Placement
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Drawing Containing Typical Annotation Elements
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
521
Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Drawings Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Drawings Print Exercise Reference
In this exercise, you will open a drawing and assume this drawing must meet your own company standards. You will edit the drawing by modifying or creating views, annotation, title blocks, drawing standards, dimensions styles and any other properties that would be required to complete the drawing to your company's standards.
To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
2.
From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings, click Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Drawings
The completed exercise is shown in the following image.
Challenge Exercise Drawing
522
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Chapter Summary Summary
You learned the following in this chapter: Summary
•
How to create and utilize drafting standards.
•
How to create and use text styles and dimension styles.
•
How to save text and dimension styles within a drawing template for later use.
•
How to perform several functions related to managing drawing resources.
•
How to create and edit base views and projected views.
•
The options available in the Drawing View dialog box and how they effect the drawing views when you create them.
•
How to create section views of parts and assemblies.
•
How to create sketch geometry representing the section path and how to project isometric section views.
•
How to magnify a specific area on your drawing by creating detail views. You also learned how to edit these views by changing the scale, area effected, and annotation associated with the detail view.
•
How to create and edit auxiliary views.
•
How to create and edit broken views on your sheet. You also learned how the available options in the Broken View dialog box can effect the view as it is created.
•
How to create and edit Break Out views. You learned about the options available in the Break Out View dialog box and how to use these options to generate the required view.
•
How to manage drawing views and sections by adjusting the alignment options as required.
•
How to delete drawing views and copy and/or move views from one sheet to another in the current drawing.
•
How to retrieve model dimensions for use in the drawing.
•
How to place additional reference dimensions on the sheet.
•
How to apply different types of annotation objects to your drawing.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
523
524
Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings
Project Exercise Review the goals and images of the drawings that follow. You can find guidelines to aid in completing the models for the drawing files using the Electronic Student Workbook.
In this chapter
To navigate to the exercises in the Electronic Student Workbook:
•
Create an assembly based on parameters defined in a 2D drawing.
•
Create and assemble a number of parts based on parameters defined in 2D drawings.
•
Create a presentation file that documents assembly instructions for a completed assembly.
•
Create 2D documentation on a created assembly file.
1. 2. 3.
From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 8: Project Exercise From the table of contents for Chapter 8: Project Exercise, click Overview Review the goals for the exercise and use the navigation buttons in the Electronic Student Workbook to work through the exercises.
After completing this chapter, you will be able to...
Irrigation Control Unit Overview Overview
Overview In this exercise you build the Irrigation Control Unit shown below. You will design each part of the Irrigation Control Unit (ICU) from scratch. After you model and detail each part, you create the assembly model for the ICU. During this process you assembly the parts you design, perform interference detection, calculate mass properties, and generate a drawing of the assembly showing part interaction, assembly instructions, and a bill of materials.
Completed Irrigation Control Unit
Objectives This all-inclusive exercise requires more than the design of a single part. It incorporates the design and documentation of seven separate parts and an assembly of 14 components. The approach outlined in this exercise is not the only way to approach the design of this Irrigation Control Unit. The approach shown here is intended to illustrate the use of Autodesk Inventor software for modeling, analyzing, and generating drawings of individual parts and the assembly of those parts.
526
Chapter 8: Project Exercise
The average time required to complete this exercise varies, but should take no longer than 6-8 hours. By completing this exercise you will explore the following Autodesk Inventor capabilities: Using Feature Patterns
Assembly Drawing Creation
Defining Tapped Holes
Constraining Components
Using Hole Notes
Using Projected Edges
Using Parameters and Linking
Copying Sketches
Mirroring Parts
Using To-Face Terminations
Using Construction Lines
Shelling Parts
Part Drawing Creation
Interference Detection
Presentation File Creation
Tweaking and Applying Trails
Attaching Balloons to Components
Generating a Bill of Materials
Generating Mass Properties
Part Modification in an Assembly
It is recommended that you create all of the parts contained in the Irrigation Control Unit by following the instructions in this exercise. You will gain the greatest benefit from this exercise by completing the design and documentation of each part as well as the assembly.
Design Goals The Irrigation Control Unit documented in this project controls the flow of a solution to two separate locations through the use of Right and Left Buttons. When a button is pressed, the solution from the main flow tube of the ICU flows through the exit tube. Solution flow is controlled by Valves located in the main cavities of the ICU. When the Valve is in the closed position, the solution from the main flow tube is restricted from flowing through the Valve and out the exit tubes. When the Valve is in the open position, the solution flows through the right, left, or both gates provided in the Valves and out the exit tubes. The following is a list of goals or rules for the creation of the Irrigation Control Unit. This list describes your design criteria for the entire ICU exercise. Individual part design goals are provided as that portion of the exercise is presented to you. •
All parts must be fully parametric and have individual part drawings.
•
All parts must be created in Metric (mm) units.
•
Components (other than the rubber O-Rings) must not interfere.
•
Parts must be designed to match the following drawings.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
527
Irrigation Control Unit - Closed Position
528
Chapter 8: Project Exercise
Irrigation Control Unit - Open Position
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
529
Valve Housing
530
Chapter 8: Project Exercise
Completed Irrigation Control Unit
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
531
Valve
532
Chapter 8: Project Exercise
Left and Right Buttons
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved
533
534
Chapter 8: Project Exercise